Set of servers for “machine-to-machine” communications using public key infrastructure

ABSTRACT

A set of servers can support secure and efficient “Machine to Machine” communications using an application interface and a module controller. The set of servers can record data for a plurality of modules in a shared module database. The set of servers can (i) access the Internet to communicate with a module using a module identity, (i) receive server instructions, and (iii) send module instructions. Data can be encrypted and decrypted using a set of cryptographic algorithms and a set of cryptographic parameters. The set of servers can (i) receive a module public key with a module identity, (ii) authenticate the module public key, and (iii) receive a subsequent series of module public keys derived by the module with a module identity. The application interface can use a first server private key and the module controller can use a second server private key.

CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

This is a continuation of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/064,618, filed Oct. 28, 2013 in the name of John Nix, entitled “A Set of Servers for ‘Machine-to-Machine’ Communications using Public Key Infrastructure”, which application is fully incorporated by reference herein.

The subject matter of this application is related to the subject matter of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/023,181, filed Sep. 10, 2013 in the name of John Nix, entitled “Power Management and Security for Wireless Modules in ‘Machine-to-Machine’ Communications,” which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.

The subject matter of this application is also related to the subject matter of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/039,401, filed Sep. 27, 2013 in the name of John Nix, entitled “Secure PKI Communications for ‘Machine-to-Machine’ Modules, including Key Derivation by Modules and Authenticating Public Keys,” which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.

The subject matter of this application is also related to the subject matter of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/055,606, filed Oct. 16, 2013 in the name of John Nix, entitled “Systems and Methods for ‘Machine-to-Machine’ (M2M) Communications Between Modules, Servers, and an Application using Public Key Infrastructure (PKI),” which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.

BACKGROUND

Technical Field

The present methods and systems relate to communications between a set of servers and a plurality of modules, and more particularly, to methods and systems for supporting secure, efficient, and flexible communications using Internet Protocol networks, where a server can communicate with both a “machine-to-machine” module and an application.

Description of Related Art

The combination of “machine-to-machine” (M2M) communications and using low-cost sensors, Internet connections, and processors is a promising and growing field. Among many potential benefits, M2M technologies allow the remote monitoring and/or control of people, assets, or a location where manual monitoring is not economic, or costs can be significantly reduced by using automated monitoring as opposed to manual techniques. Prominent examples today include vending machines, automobiles, alarm systems, and remote sensors. Fast growing markets for M2M applications today include tracking devices for shipping containers or pallets, health applications such as, but not limited to, the remote monitoring of a person's glucose levels or heartbeat, monitoring of industrial equipment deployed in the field, and security systems. Many M2M applications leverage either wired Internet connections or wireless connections, and both types of connections continue to grow rapidly. M2M applications may also be referred to as “the Internet of things”.

M2M communications can provide remote control over actuators that may be connected to a M2M device, such as, but not limited to, turning on or off a power switch, locking or unlocking a door, adjusting a speed of a motor, or similar remote control. A decision to change or adjust an actuator associated with an M2M device can utilize one or a series of sensor measurements. An M2M device may also be referred to as a “wireless module” or also simply a module. As one example, if a building or room is too cold, then temperature can be reported to a central server by an M2M device and the server can instruct the M2M device to turn on a switch that activates heat or adjusts a thermostat. As the costs for computer and networking hardware continue to decline, together with the growing ease of obtaining either wired or wireless Internet access for small form-factor devices, the number of economically favorable applications for M2M communications grows.

Many M2M applications can leverage wireless networking technologies. Wireless technologies such as, but not limited to, wireless local area networks and wireless wide area networks have proliferated around the world over the past 15 years, and usage of these wireless networks is also expected to continue to grow. Wireless local area network (LAN) technologies include WiFi and wireless wide area network (WAN) technologies include 3^(rd) Generation Partnership Project's (3GPP) 3^(rd) Generation (3G) Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) and 4^(th) Generation (4G) Long-term Evolution (LTE), LTE Advanced, and the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers' (IEEE) 802.16 standard, also known as WiMax. The use of wireless technologies with “machine-to-machine” communications creates new opportunities for the deployment of M2M modules in locations without fixed-wire Internet access, but also creates a significant new class of problems that need to be solved.

First, many wireless wide-area networking standards were designed and optimized for mobile phones, which may be continuously connected to the network during the day (i.e. non-sleeping hours for most subscribers while they may charge phones at night), in order to receive inbound phone calls and messages. In this case, the radio may be in an idle state but utilizing discontinuous reception, but the radio is still active and drawing power in order to receive and process incoming signaling from the network such as, but not limited to, a Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN). A need exists in the art to make wireless M2M communications efficient in order to conserve battery life and radio-frequency spectrum resources.

Since the packets transmitted and received by a wireless module will likely traverse the public Internet for many applications, a need exists in the art to (i) prevent eavesdropping at intermediate points along the path of packets transmitted and received, (ii) allow endpoints to verify the identity of the source of packets received. A need exists in the art for a wireless module and a monitoring server to leverage established public key infrastructure (PKI) techniques and algorithms. A need exists in the art for communication to be secured without requiring the established, but relatively processing, bandwidth, and energy intensive security protocols, such as, but not limited to, IPSec, Transport Layer Security (TLS), and Secure Socket Layer (SSL) between a module and a server. The establishment of theses links requires extra overhead in the form of packet handshakes and/or key exchanges at levels including the network and transport layer of the traditional Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) model.

M2M applications frequently require small, periodic messages sent between a wireless module and a monitoring server, where the wireless module sleeps between the messages. M2M applications may leverage wired modules as well which can also sleep between messages. During relatively long periods of sleep such as 30 minutes or more, the a wireless or wired network with intermediate firewalls will often tear down the network and/or transport layer connections, which means the wireless module would need to re-negotiate or reestablish the secure tunnels each time the wireless module wakes and seeks to send a relatively small message to a server. A need exists in the art for supporting established security protocols with an external application, without requiring them to be implemented on a module due to the relatively long periods of sleep and other complexities from inactivity in the module.

Next, a need exists in the art for the communication between a module and a monitoring server to be highly energy and bandwidth efficient in order to reduce energy consumption over the operating lifetime of a module. A limiting factor for a wireless module for M2M applications deployed or installed into the field is the lifetime of the battery of the wireless module. If the transmission techniques for the wireless module are not energy efficient, the system will require more frequent manual intervention for the replacement or recharging of batteries. The energy saving techniques for transmitting and receiving data should leverage established Internet protocols. For wired modules operating for years or decades, a significant cost will be the power consumed from land-line power.

Further, a need exists in the art for the secure, energy efficient communications that support Internet protocols to support intermediate firewalls that may exist along the path of packets sent and received by both a wireless module and a monitoring server. Without support for communication through an intermediate firewall, packets may be blocked by the firewall and the M2M application would not properly function in this case. Currently, there are dozens of manufacturers and form-factors of modules, and this diversity will continue to increase for the foreseeable future. By leveraging standards such as the Internet and PKI technologies, an efficient, secure, and highly scalable system of communicating could support the wide variety of modules.

In addition, the utilization of PM technologies in modules can increase security, but a number of technical challenges must be addressed. These challenges increase if a deployed module required updated private/public key pairs after operation begins. The typical paradigm of “swapping out a SIM card” (which also depend on a pre-shared secret key Ki embedded in the card) with mobile phones may not be applicable or cost effective with modules, where swapping out the SIM card could be burdensome. A need exists in the art to allow for a deployed module to securely and automatically begin using new private and public keys (i.e. without human intervention such as swapping out a SIM card). Newer PKI technologies may offer a wide variety of algorithms for ciphering with public keys, and a need exists in the art for the utilization of new public and private keys to support the wide variety of algorithms, even after a module has been installed. A need exists in the art for a scalable and secure method of associating a module identity with a module public key, when the module begins utilizing a new public key. A need exists in the art for a module to efficiently be able to utilize multiple public/private key pairs at the same time, such as with different service providers or different applications simultaneously.

Another desirable feature is for an M2M module to efficiently and securely communicate with applications. Applications can include a web-based interface for users to view status or input settings for a plurality of modules, and the modules may be associated with an M2M service provider. However, a set of PKI algorithms, keys, and communication protocols within used by the module for efficient communications module may not be directly compatible with an application. As one example, the application on a web server may prefer to use a transport layer security (TLS) protocol with transmission control protocol (TCP) datagrams, while for energy efficiency and to conserve battery life, an M2M module may prefer to use user datagram protocol (UDP). A need exists in the art for an intermediate server to securely translate secure communications to/from a module into secure communication from/to an application. As another example, it would be desirable for a module to support elliptic key cryptography (ECC), while the application may support RSA-based cryptography, and therefore a need exists in the art for a server to securely translate between the two cryptographic methods, thereby allowing the M2M module to communicate with the application.

And other needs exist in the art as well, as the list recited above is not meant to be exhaustive but rather illustrative.

SUMMARY

Methods and systems are provided for secure and efficient communication using a server to communicate with modules and an application. The modules and application can support “Machine to Machine” communications. The methods and systems contemplated herein can also support other applications as well, including mobile phone handsets connecting to a wireless network. An objective of the invention is to address the challenges noted above for securing the deployment of modules that utilize PKI algorithms and keys, as well as increasing efficiency in order to reduce power consumption, including extending the battery life of a module, if present. More efficient communication can also conserve valuable radio-frequency spectrum, among other benefits. Using a server for secure and reliable communication of data between an application and a module can increase the value and usefulness of modules for a user.

An exemplary embodiment may take the form of methods and systems for a server to securely receive data from a module and forward the data to an application server, and an application may operate on the application server. The application can include a graphical user interface for a user to visually see reports and/or control modules. The module, server, and application can preferably include a set of cryptographic algorithms for use in sending and receiving data. The cryptographic algorithms can include asymmetric ciphering algorithms, symmetric ciphering algorithms, secure hash algorithms, digital signature algorithms, key pair generation algorithms, a key derivation function, and/or a random number generator.

The module can utilize the set of cryptographic algorithms to securely generate or derive a module private key and a module public key. The module private key and module public key can be generated either (i) upon initial use or installation of the module, or (ii) at a subsequent time after initial use such as when a new set of key pairs are required or are useful for continued operation of the module. After deriving the module public key and module private key, the module private key is preferably recorded in a secure or protected location in a nonvolatile memory within the module. In one embodiment, the module may then utilize a recorded pre-shared secret key to authenticate with a server that also records or has access to the pre-shared secret key and the module identity. The authentication could comprise either using message digest with the pre-shared secret key, or using the pre-shared secret key in processing a symmetric ciphering key, and the authentication may also utilize a second key derived by both the module and the server using the pre-shared secret key. After authentication, the server can authoritatively record the derived module public key with the module identity in a database. Thus, the use of a pre-shared secret key can ensure the submitted module public key is validly associated with the module and module identity.

The server can (i) include a private key associated with the server, and (ii) receive the derived module public key. The server public key can leverage established public key infrastructure (PKI) standards, such as, but not limited to, X.509 v3 certificates and RSA or elliptic curve cryptography (ECC) algorithms and include a digital signature from a certificate authority. The server can use a module controller and an operating system plus a connection to the Internet to monitor a socket for incoming messages from a module. After receiving the module public key, including potentially after a period of sleep or dormancy by the module, the server can receive a message, where the message includes a module identity and a module encrypted data. The module encrypted data can include a server instruction, a security token, and additional data such as, but not limited to, a sensor measurement. The server can decrypt the module encrypted data using the received module public key and extract plaintext data from the module encrypted data.

The server can establish a secure connection with the application server using a secure connection setup, which could comprise the initial handshake messages for a transport-layer security protocol such as, but not limited to, transport layer security (TLS) or IPSec. The secure connection setup can include the transfer of a server public key and an application server public key. The server can send an application message to the application server using a secure connection data transfer, where the application message includes data received from the module such as, but not limited to, a sensor measurement or sensor data. The server can use (i) an RSA-based asymmetric ciphering algorithm and first server public key with the application server to securely transfer a first symmetric key to the application server, and (ii) an ECC-based asymmetric ciphering algorithm and second server public key with the module to securely transfer a second symmetric key to the module. In an exemplary embodiment the server may also preferably use a transmission control protocol (TCP) with the application server and a user datagram protocol (UDP) with the module. The application message to the application server can include a server identity, an encrypted update instruction, and the sensor data. The sensor data may also include a sensor identity. The server can use a first Internet protocol address and port (IP:port) number for receiving the message from the module and a second IP:port number for sending the application message to the application server. The application server can record the sensor data in an application database for subsequent processing and analysis for a user or other business or commercial needs.

In another embodiment, the module may be deployed within a wireless network such as, but not limited to, a 4G LTE network or a WiFi network, and the module may comprise a wireless module. The module can change state between a sleep state and an active state, wherein the sleep state may utilize a few milliwatts or less and the active state, including transmission of radio signals, may utilize several hundred milliwatts of power or more. After being installed next to a monitored unit, the wireless module can wake from a sleep or dormant state, utilize a sensor to collect data associated with the monitored unit, connect to the wireless network and the Internet, and send the sensor data to a server. During an active period, the module can use a UDP IP:port number to both send a message to the server and receive a response to the server. The message as a UDP datagram can be a UDP Lite datagram and with a checksum only applied to the packet header. A UDP Lite datagram with sensor data can include channel coding for the body of the datagram to mitigate the effect of bit errors. Or, a regular UDP packet could be sent in multiple copies in order to provide forward error correction.

In another embodiment of the present invention, the application server may send an application message to the server using a secure connection data transfer. The application message could be encrypted using a first server public key and could include a module identity and a module instruction. The module instruction can include an actuator setting, and also optionally an actuator identity (since the module may include multiple actuators). The server can decrypt encrypted data within the application message and record the module identity and module instruction in memory or a module database. Since the module can transition between periods of sleep and active states to conserve power, after receiving the application message the server can wait until a next message is received from the module with the module identity before sending the module instruction in a response. After waiting for the next message, the server can send the module instruction to the module in a server encrypted data using a second server public key. The first and second server public keys can use different cryptographic algorithms that are not directly compatible (i.e. the first server public key could be RSA-based and the second server public key could be ECC-based).

In another embodiment, the server can securely send the module a set of cryptographic parameters, where the set of cryptographic parameters includes values to define an equation for an elliptic curve. The values could comprise constants and variables such that the module can calculate a new elliptic curve, and the elliptic curve can be different than standard, published curves. The set of cryptographic parameters could be sent from the server to the module in a server encrypted data, where the server encrypted data was processed using any of (i) a first module public key, (ii) a symmetric key, and (iii) a shared secret key. The module can use the set of cryptographic parameters, a random number generator, and a key generation function within a cryptographic algorithms in order to generate a new key pair, which could comprise a second module public key and a second module private key. The module can securely and/or authoritatively send the second module public key to the server, where the security includes the use of the first module public key and/or the shared secret key.

Continuing with this embodiment, after the server confirms the proper receipt of the second, derived module public key in a response message, the server and the module can begin secure communications between them using the second module public key. By using this exemplary embodiment, security can be further increased with the server and module using an elliptic curve that can be unique, non-standard, or defined between them and security therefore increased. In this exemplary embodiment, the parameters to define the elliptic curve equation are sent securely to the module, so an observer along the flow of data could not observe the elliptic equation being used with a public key.

In yet another embodiment, the server can receive a first message with a module identity and a module encrypted data, where the first module encrypted data includes a first sensor measurement. The server can use a first module public key associated with a first module public key identity to decrypt the first module encrypted data. As one example, (a) the first module encrypted data could be ciphered with a symmetric key, and (b) the symmetric key could have been communicated using the first module public key (including using the first module public key to verify a module digital signature in a session or flow of packets where the symmetric key was transferred), and therefore (c) the module encrypted data could be encrypted using the first module public key. The server can also use a first server public key to decrypt the first module encrypted data, such as, but not limited to, the symmetric key being derived using both the first module public key and the first server public key and a key derivation function within a cryptographic algorithms. The server can extract the first sensor measurement and send the data to an application server in an application message. The application message could be encrypted using a second server public key. The first and second server public keys can be different because they could each be associated with a different algorithm or defining equation.

Continuing with this embodiment, the server can send a module instruction and a set of cryptographic parameters to the module, where the module is instructed to derive a new set of keys, and the module can subsequently derive a second module public key and a second module private key after receiving the module instruction. The module can then send the second module public key, a second module public key identity, and the module identity to the server. The server can receive a second module encrypted data that includes a second sensor data, where the second sensor data is encrypted using the second module public key. As one example, (a) the second module encrypted data could be ciphered with a symmetric key, and (b) the symmetric key could have been communicated using the second module public key (including using the second module public key to verify a module digital signature in a session where the symmetric key was transferred), and therefore (c) the module encrypted data could be encrypted using the second module public key. The server can extract the second sensor data using the second module public key. The server can use the second server public key to send a second application message with the second sensor data to the application server. Note that the module public key can change, but both (i) the second server public key used with the application server and also (ii) keys associated with the application server did not change. In this manner according to this embodiment, a module can derive a new public and private key while a server and application server can continue to communicate using existing public and private keys.

In another embodiment, a system supporting M2M communications can include a set of application servers, a set of servers, and a set of modules. The set of servers can record and query data from a shared module database. At least one of the application servers can process or originate a module instruction, and send the module instruction with a module identity to the shared module database. A module with the module identity may wake from a dormant state and send a message with a module identity and a module encrypted data to a server, where the server was a member of the set of servers. Upon receiving the message and verifying the message originated from a module with the module identity, the server can poll the shared module database using the module identity. The shared module database can return the module instruction that was recorded by the application server. The server can send the module instruction to the module with the module identity in a response. Upon executing the module instruction, the module can send a confirmation with a timestamp to the server in a module encrypted data. The server can then send the timestamp and a module identity in an application message to the application server, and in this manner the application server can determine a time when the module instruction was processed by the module.

In an exemplary embodiment, a module with a module identity can derive its own public and private keys after distribution of the module using a set of cryptographic parameters. A set of servers can receive a message that uses a module identity, where the module identity can be verified using at least one of a module digital signature and a shared secret key. The set of servers can send the module with the module identity the set of cryptographic parameters. Over time, the module can use at least a subset of the cryptographic parameters to derive multiple pairs of module public and private keys. Over time, the server can receive a series of module public keys with the module identity and use a previous module public key in the series to verify and/or authenticate a message with a module public key.

These as well as other aspects and advantages will become apparent to those of ordinary skill in the art by reading the following detailed description, with reference where appropriate to the accompanying drawings.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

Various exemplary embodiments are described herein with reference to the following drawings, wherein like numerals denote like entities.

FIG. 1a is a graphical illustration of an exemplary system, where a server and a module connect to the Internet, in accordance with exemplary embodiments;

FIG. 1b is a graphical illustration of hardware, firmware, and software components for a module, in accordance with exemplary embodiments;

FIG. 1c is a graphical illustration of hardware, firmware, and software components for a server, in accordance with exemplary embodiments;

FIG. 1d is a graphical illustration of hardware, firmware, and software components for an application server, in accordance with exemplary embodiments;

FIG. 1e is a graphical illustration of components within a module, in accordance with exemplary embodiments;

FIG. 1f is a graphical illustration of components within a server, in accordance with exemplary embodiments;

FIG. 1g is a graphical illustration of components in a set of cryptographic algorithms, in accordance with exemplary embodiments;

FIG. 1h is a graphical illustration of an exemplary system that includes a user, an application, a set of servers, and a set of modules, in accordance with exemplary embodiments;

FIG. 2 is a graphical illustration of an exemplary system, where a module sends a message to a server, and where the server responds to the message, in accordance with exemplary embodiments;

FIG. 3 is a flow chart illustrating exemplary steps for a server to receive a message from a module, in accordance with exemplary embodiments;

FIG. 4 a is a flow chart illustrating exemplary steps for a server to process a message, including verifying a module's identity and decrypting data, in accordance with exemplary embodiments;

FIG. 5a is a flow chart illustrating exemplary steps for a server to process a response for a module, including sending and signing a module instruction, in accordance with exemplary embodiments;

FIG. 5b is a flow chart illustrating exemplary steps for a server to communicate with a module that has derived a public key and private key, in accordance with exemplary embodiments;

FIG. 6a is a simplified message flow diagram illustrating an exemplary message received by a server, and an exemplary response sent from the server, in accordance with exemplary embodiments;

FIG. 6b is a simplified message flow diagram illustrating an exemplary message received by a server, wherein the message includes a derived module public key, in accordance with exemplary embodiments;

FIG. 7 is a simplified message flow diagram illustrating an exemplary system with exemplary data transferred between a module and an application using a server, in accordance with exemplary embodiments;

FIG. 8 is a simplified message flow diagram illustrating an exemplary system with exemplary data transferred between a module and an application using a server, in accordance with exemplary embodiments;

FIG. 9 is a simplified message flow diagram illustrating exemplary data transferred between (i) a server and an application and between (ii) a server and a module, in accordance with exemplary embodiments;

FIG. 10 is a flow chart illustrating exemplary steps for a set of servers to communicate with a module, in accordance with exemplary embodiments;

FIG. 11 is a flow chart illustrating exemplary steps for a set of servers to communicate with a module and an application server, in accordance with exemplary embodiments;

FIG. 12 is a simplified message flow diagram illustrating an exemplary system with exemplary data transferred between a module and an application using a server, in accordance with exemplary embodiments;

FIG. 13 is a simplified message flow diagram illustrating an exemplary system with exemplary data transferred between a module and an application using a server, in accordance with exemplary embodiments;

FIG. 14 is a graphical illustration of an exemplary system that includes a set of application servers, a set of servers, and a set of modules, in accordance with exemplary embodiments.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS OF THE INVENTION

FIG. 1a

FIG. 1a is a graphical illustration of an exemplary system, where a server and a module connect to the Internet, in accordance with exemplary embodiments. The system 100 includes a module 101 operating within a wireless network 102. System 100 can also include a module provider 109, an Internet 107, and an M2M service provider 108, a certificate authority 118, and a monitored unit 119. M2M service provider 108 can include a server 105. System 100 is illustrated without specific packet transmissions between module 101 and M2M service provider 108. Examples of the communications and messages pertaining to the present invention will be illustrated in later Figures. As contemplated herein, machine-to-machine communications may comprise communication between a module 101 and a server 105, such that data can be transferred between the two with minimal manual intervention, although manual intervention can be required to set up system 100 and any occasional manual maintenance required. As contemplated herein, machine-to-machine communications may also be referred to as “the Internet of things” (IoT). Also note that module 101 may comprise a wireless module, such that module 101 can communicate with wireless network 102 using a radio and an antenna. A wireless or a wired configuration for module 101 can be utilized in the present invention.

If module 101 operates as a wireless module, module 101 and wireless network 102 can communicate using a base station 103. Module 101 and wireless network 102 can utilize a variety of wireless technologies to communicate, including WiFi, WiMax, a 2nd generation wireless wide area network (WAN) technology such as, but not limited to, General Packet Radio Services (GPRS) or Enhanced Data rates for GSM Evolution (EDGE), 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) technology such as, but not limited to, 3G, 4G LTE, or 4G LTE Advanced, and other examples exist as well. A wired module 101 can connect to the Internet 107 via a wired connection such as, but not limited to, an Ethernet, a fiber optic, or a Universal Serial Bus (USB) connection (not shown).

Generally, the communication techniques described herein can be independent of the network technologies utilized at the physical and data-link layers, so long as the underlying network provides access to the Internet 107 and supports Internet Protocols (IP). The Internet 107 can be an IPv4 or an IPv6 packet-switched based network that utilizes standards derived from the Internet Engineering Task Force, such as, but not limited to, RFC 786 (User Datagram Protocol), RFC 793 (Transmission Control Protocol), and related protocols. The Internet 107 can be the public Internet comprising globally routable IP addresses, or a private network that utilizes private IP addresses. Although Internet 107 is illustrated as the globally routable public Internet in FIG. 1, Internet 107 could also be a private Internet that is (i) not globally routable and (ii) only accessible to authorized modules and servers. As one example of a private Internet 107, Internet 107 could use private IP addresses for nodes on the network, and in this case Internet 107 could be referred to as an intranet or private network. Alternatively, Internet 107 could be a private network layered on top of the publicly routable Internet via secured and encrypted connections. The specific numbers for IP addresses and port numbers shown in FIG. 1 and other figures are illustrative and any valid IP address or port number can be used, including an IPv4 and an IPv6 address.

When operating in a wireless network configuration, module 101 can access the Internet 107 via the wireless network 102. In the wireless network configuration, module 101 can be a wireless handset, a cellular phone, a smartphone, a tablet computer, a laptop, a computer with a radio, a tracking device, or a circuit board with a radio that accesses wireless network 102. Examples of wireless modules that utilize a wireless WAN such as, but not limited to, 2G and 3G networking technologies include the Motorola® G24-1 and Huawei® MC323. Example manufacturers of wireless modules in 2012 include Sierra Wireless® and Telit®. In a wired configuration (not shown), module 101 can be a computer, security camera, security monitoring device, networked controller, etc. A more detailed depiction of exemplary components of a module 101 is included in FIG. 1b and FIG. 1e below. Module 101 could also comprise a “point of presence” payment terminal, such that a sensor 101 f associated with module 101 could collect payment information such as, but not limited to, an account number from a credit card or similar payment card. Module 101 could communicate with the payment card via a magnetic reader or near-field wireless communications, and in this case the magnetic reader or antenna for near-field communications can function as a sensor. Module 101 could also operate as a “smartcard” such that an end user presents module 101 to merchants for payments.

Wireless network 102 may comprise either a wireless local area network (LAN) such as, but not limited to, an 802.11 WLAN, Bluetooth, or Zigbee among other possibilities, and module 101 operating in wireless mode could communicate with a base station 103 of a wireless network 102 using a radio and an antenna. Wireless network 102 could operate as a Mode II device according to FCC Memorandum Opinion and Order (FC-12-36) and related white space regulation documents. If module 101 supports IEEE 802.15.4, then wireless network 102 could be a Zigbee network, an ISA100.11a standards-based network, or a 6LoWPAN network as described by IETF RFC 4944. Other possibilities exist as well for the wireless technology utilized by a wireless network 102 and module 101, operating in a wireless mode, without departing from the scope of the present invention.

Module 101 can collect data regarding a monitored unit 119 and periodically report status to an M2M service provider 108 or a server 105. Examples of a monitored unit 119 can include a vending machine, an alarm system, an automobile or truck, a standard 40-foot or 20-foot shipping container, or industrial equipment such as, but not limited to, a transformer on an electrical grid or elevator in a building. Additional examples of a monitored unit 119 include can also include a pallet for shipping or receiving goods, an individual box of pharmaceuticals, a health monitoring device attached to a person such as, but not limited to, a pacemaker or glucose monitor, and a gate or door for opening and closing. Other examples exist as well without departing from the scope of the present invention. Module 101 can utilize a sensor to measure and collect data regarding a parameter of monitored unit 119 such as, but not limited to, temperature, physical location potentially including geographical coordinates from a Global Positioning System (GPS) receiver, radiation, humidity, surrounding light levels, surrounding RF signals, weight, vibration and/or shock, voltage, current, and/or similar measurements.

As illustrated in FIG. 1a , wireless network 102 may include a wireless network firewall 104 and M2M service provider 108 may include a server network firewall 124. These firewalls may be used to secure communication at the data link, network, transport, and/or application layers of communications using the Internet 107. Firewalls 104 and 124 could perform network address translation (NAT) routing or operate as symmetric firewalls, and selectively filter packets received through Internet 107 in order to secure system 100. The firewall functionality of firewalls 104 and 124 could be of many possible types, including a symmetric firewall, a network-layer firewall that filters inbound packets according to pre-determined rules, an application-layer firewall, or a NAT router, as examples. Although a single firewall 104 and 124 is illustrated in wireless network 102 (or a wired network 102 or simply “network 102”) and with M2M service provider 108, respectively, firewall 104 and 124 may each comprise multiple firewalls that operate in conjunction and the combined operation may be considered a single firewall 104 and 124, respectively. Firewall 104 and/or firewall 124 can include a firewall port binding timeout value 117 (illustrated in FIG. 2), which can represent the time allowed for an inbound packet from the Internet 107 to pass through firewall 104 or firewall 124 after module 101 or server 105, respectively, sends a packet out. Firewall port binding timeout value 117 may be determined on a per-protocol basis, such as an exemplary time of 60 seconds for UDP packets and 8 minutes for TCP packets, although other time values for a firewall port binding timeout value 117 are possible as well. Inbound packets from Internet 107 to module 101 may be dropped by firewall 104 after a time exceeding firewall port binding timeout value 117 has transpired since the last packet transmitted by module 101.

According to a preferred exemplary embodiment, module 101 may preferably record a module private key 112. As described in additional figures below, module 112 can generate a key pair comprising a module private key 112 and a module public key 111, where module private key 112 resides within module 101 and may not be shared or transmitted to other parties. Alternatively, the present invention also contemplates that module 101 does not derive its own module private key 112, and rather module private key 112 is securely loaded or transmitted to module 101. Module 101 may also be associated with a module provider 109. Module provider 109 could be a manufacturer or distributor of module 101, or may also be the company that installs and services module 101 or associates module 101 with monitored unit 119. Module provider 109 can record a module public key 111 and a certificate 122 (illustrated below in FIG. 1e ) for module 101. Module public key 111 may be associated with a module public key identity 111 a, which could be an identifier of module public key 111.

In embodiments, a module 101 may utilize multiple module public keys 111 over the lifetime of module 101 (including multiple corresponding module private keys 112), and module public key identity 111 a can be used to select and/or identify the correct module public key 111. Module public key identity 111 a could be a string or sequence number uniquely associated with module public key 111 for a given module 101 (i.e. module public key identity 111 a does not need to be globally unique). As illustrated in FIG. 1a , module public key identity 111 a may preferably not be included in the string or number comprising module public key 111, but rather associated with the string or number comprising module public key 111, and in this case the two together (module public key identity 111 a and the string or number for module public key 111) can refer to module public key 111 as contemplated herein.

The module public key 111 can optionally be signed by a certificate authority 118 in order to confirm the identity of module 101 and/or the identity of module provider 109. Module provider 109 can also function as a certificate authority 118 for module 101. Thus, the validity of module public key 111, possibly recorded in a certificate 122 (illustrated in FIG. 1e ) could be checked with module provider 109, and the wireless module provider's 109 provider public key 120 could be checked against certificate authority 118. Other configurations for signing public keys and using certificates with public keys are possible as well without departing from the scope of the present invention.

Public keys and private keys as contemplated in the present invention, including module public key 111 and module private key 112 and additional keys described herein, may leverage established standards for Public Key Infrastructure (PKI). Public keys may be formatted according to the X.509 series of standards, such as, but not limited to, X.509 v3 certificates, and subsequent or future versions, and these keys may be considered cryptographic keys. The keys can support standards such as, but not limited to, the International Organization for Standardization (ISO) ISO/IEC 9594 series of standards (herein incorporated by reference) and the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) RFC 5280 titled “Internet X.509 Public Key Infrastructure Certificate and Certificate Revocation List (CRL) Profile” (herein incorporated by reference), including future updates to these standards.

Module public key 111 and module private key 112, as well as the other private and public keys described within the present invention, could be generated using standard software tools such as, but not limited to, Openssl, and other tools to generate public and private keys exist as well. Public and private keys as contemplated herein could be recorded in a file such as, but not limited to, a *.pem file (Privacy-enhanced Electronic Mail), a file formatted according to Basic Encoding Rules (BER), Canonical Encoding Rules (CER), or Distinguished Encoding Rules (DER), or as text or binary file. Other formats for public and private keys may be utilized as well, including proprietary formats, without departing from the scope of the present invention. As contemplated herein, a key may also comprise either a public key or a private key. A public key as contemplated herein may also be considered a certificate or a public certificate. A private key as contemplated herein may also be considered a secret key.

Other configurations besides the one illustrated in FIG. 1a are possible as well. Server 105 could reside within wireless network 102 in a data center managed by wireless network 102. Wireless network 102 could also operate as a module provider 109. Although a single module 101 and server 105 are illustrated in FIG. 1a , system 100 could comprise a plurality of each of these elements. Module 101 could also record sensor data pertaining to a plurality of monitored units 119. Module 101 could be mobile, such as physically attached to a truck or a pallet, and module 101 could connect to a series of different wireless networks 102 or base stations 103 as module 101 moves geographically. Other configurations are possible as well without departing from the scope of the present invention.

FIG. 1b

FIG. 1b is a graphical illustration of hardware, firmware, and software components for a module, in accordance with exemplary embodiments. FIG. 1b is illustrated to include many components that can be common within a module 101, and module 101 may also operate in a wireless configuration in order to connect with a wireless network 102. Module 101 may consist of multiple components in order to collect sensor data or control an actuator associated with a monitored unit 119. In a wireless configuration, the physical interface 101 a of module 101 may support radio-frequency (RF) communications with networks including a wireless network 102 via standards such as, but not limited to, GSM, UMTS, mobile WiMax, CDMA, LTE, LTE Advanced, and/or other mobile-network technologies. In a wireless configuration, the physical interface 101 a may also provide connectivity to local networks such as, but not limited to, 802.11 WLAN, Bluetooth, or Zigbee among other possibilities. In a wireless configuration, module 101 could use a physical interface 101 a be connected with both a wireless WAN and wireless LAN simultaneously. In a wired configuration, the physical interface 101 a can provide connectivity to a wired network such as, but not limited to, through an Ethernet connection or USB connection.

The physical interface 101 a can include associated hardware to provide the connections such as, but not limited to, radio-frequency (RF) chipsets, a power amplifier, an antenna, cable connectors, etc., and additional exemplary details regarding these components are described below in FIG. 1e . Device driver 101 g can communicate with the physical interfaces 101 a, providing hardware access to higher-level functions on module 101. Device drivers 101 g may also be embedded into hardware or combined with the physical interfaces. Module 101 may preferably include an operating system 101 h to manage device drivers 101 g and hardware resources within module 101. The operating systems described herein can also manage other resources such as, but not limited to, memory and may support multiple software programs operating on module 101 or server 105, respectively, at the same time. The operating system 101 h can include Internet protocol stacks such as, but not limited to, a User Datagram Protocol (UDP) stack, Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) stack, a domain name system (DNS) stack, etc., and the operating system 101 h may include timers and schedulers for managing the access of software to hardware resources. The operating system shown of 101 h can be appropriate for a low-power device with limited memory and CPU resources (compared to a server 105). An example operating system 101 h for module 101 includes Linux, Android® from Google®, Windows® Mobile, or Open AT® from Sierra Wireless®. Additional example operating systems 101 h for module 101 include eCos, uC/OS, LiteOs, and Contiki, and other possibilities exist as well without departing from the scope of the present invention.

A module program 101 i may be an application programmed in a language such as, but not limited to, C, C++, Java, and/or Python, and could provide functionality to support M2M applications such as, but not limited to, remote monitoring of sensors and remote activation of actuators. Module program 101 i could also be a software routine, subroutine, linked library, or software module, according to one preferred embodiment. As contemplated herein, a module program 101 i may be an application operating within a smartphone, such as, but not limited to, an iPhone® or Android®-based smartphone, and in this case module 101 could comprise the smartphone. The application functioning as a module program 101 i could be downloaded from an “app store” associated with the smartphone. Module program 101 i can include data reporting steps 101 x, which can provide the functionality or CPU 101 b instructions for collecting sensor data, sending messages to server 105, and receiving responses from server 105, as described in the present invention.

Many of the logical steps for operation of module 101 can be performed in software and hardware by various combinations of sensor 101 f, actuator 101 y, physical interface 101 a, device driver 101 g, operating system 101 h, module program 101 i, and data reporting steps 101 x. When module 101 is described herein as performing various actions such as acquiring an IP address, connecting to the wireless network, monitoring a port, transmitting a packet, sending a message, receiving a response, or encrypting or signing data, specifying herein that module 101 performs an action can refer to software, hardware, and/or firmware operating within module 101 illustrated in FIG. 1b performing the action. Note that module 101 may also optionally include user interface 101 j which may include one or more devices for receiving inputs and/or one or more devices for conveying outputs. User interfaces are known in the art and generally are simple for modules such as, but not limited to, a few LED lights or LCD display, and thus user interfaces are not described in detail here. User interface 101 j could comprise a touch screen if module 101 operates as a smartphone or mobile phone. As illustrated in FIG. 1b , module 101 can optionally omit a user interface 101 j, since no user input may be required for many M2M applications, although a user interface 101 j could be included with module 101.

Module 101 may be a computing device that includes computer components for the purposes of collecting data from a sensor 101 f or triggering an action by an actuator 101 y. Module 101 may include a central processing unit (CPU) 101 b, a random access memory (RAM) 101 e, and a system bus 101 d that couples various system components including the random access memory 101 e to the processing unit 101 b. The system bus 101 d may be any of several types of bus structures including a memory bus or memory controller, a peripheral bus, and a local bus using any of a variety of bus architectures including a data bus. Note that the computer components illustrated for the module 101 in FIG. 1b may be selected in order to minimize power consumption and thereby maximize battery life, if module 101 includes a battery and is not attached to external power. In addition, the computer components illustrated for the module 101 in FIG. 1b may also be selected in order to optimize the system for both long periods of sleep relative to active communications and also may be optimized for predominantly uplink (i.e. device to network) communications with small packets or messages. The computer components illustrated for the module 101 in FIG. 1b may also be general-purpose computing components, and specialized components are not required in order to utilize many of the embodiments contemplated herein.

Module 101 may include a read-only memory (ROM) 101 c which can contain a boot loader program. Although ROM 101 c is illustrated as “read-only memory”, ROM 101 c could comprise long-term memory storage chipsets or physical units that are designed for writing once and reading many times. As contemplated within the present invention, a read-only address could comprise a ROM 101 c memory address or another hardware address for read-only operations accessible via bus 101 d. Changing data recorded in a ROM 101 c can require a technician have physical access to module 101, such as, but not limited to, removing a cover or part of an enclosure, where the technician can subsequently connect equipment to a circuit board in module 101, including replacing ROM 101 c. ROM 101 c could also comprise a nonvolatile memory, such that data is stored within ROM 101 c even if no electrical power is provided to ROM 101 c. Although not illustrated in FIG. 1b , but illustrated in FIG. 1e below, module 101 could also include a flash memory 101 w. Module program 101 i, data reporting steps 101 x, operating system 101 h, or device driver 101 g could be stored in flash memory 101 w within module 101 when the module is powered off. These components and/or instructions could be moved from a flash memory 101 w (not shown in FIG. 1b but shown in FIG. 1e ) into RAM 101 e when the module is powered on. Note that ROM 101 c could be optionally omitted or included in a memory unit within CPU 101 b (not shown).

Although the exemplary environment described herein employs ROM 101 c and RAM 101 e, it should be appreciated by those skilled in the art that other types of computer readable media which can store data that is accessible by a module 101, such as, but not limited to, memory cards, subscriber identity module (SIM) cards, local miniaturized hard disks, and the like, may also be used in the exemplary operating environment without departing from the scope of the invention. The memory and associated hardware illustrated in FIG. 1b provide nonvolatile storage of computer-executable instructions, data structures, program modules, module program 101 i, and other data for computer or module 101. Note the module 101 may include a physical data connection at the physical interface 101 a such as, but not limited to, a miniaturized universal serial bus adapter, firewire, optical, or other another port and the computer executable instructions such as, but not limited to, module program 101 i, data reporting steps 101 x, operating system 101 h, or device driver 101 g can be initially loaded into memory such as, but not limited to, ROM 101 c or RAM 101 e through the physical interface 101 a before module 101 is given to an end user, shipped by a manufacturer to a distribution channel, or installed by a technician. In addition, the computer executable instructions such as, but not limited to, module program 101 i, data reporting steps 101 x, operating system 101 h or device driver 101 g could be transferred wirelessly to module 101. In either case (wired or wireless transfer of computer executable instructions), the computer executable instructions such as module program 101 i, data reporting steps 101 x, operating system 101 h, or device driver 101 g could be stored remotely on a disk drive, solid state drive, or optical disk (external drives not shown).

A number of program modules may be stored in RAM 101 e, ROM 101 c, or possibly within CPU 101 b, including an operating system 101 h, device driver 101 g, an http client (not shown), a DNS client, and related software. Further, the module program 101 i and/or data reporting steps 101 x can perform the various actions described in the present invention for the module 101 through instructions the module program 101 i and/or data reporting steps 101 x provide to the CPU 101 b. A user may enter commands and information into module 101 through an optional user interface 101 j, such as a keypad, keyboard (possibly miniaturized for a mobile phone form-factor), and a pointing device. Pointing devices may include a trackball, an electronic pen, or a touch screen. A user interface 101 j illustrated in FIG. 1b can also comprise the description of a user interface 101 j within U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/039,401, filed Sep. 27, 2013 in the name of John Nix, which is herein incorporated in its entirety.

The module 101, comprising a computer, may operate in a networked environment using logical connections to one or more remote computers, such as the server 105 illustrated in FIG. 1a . Server 105 can also function as a general purpose server to provide files, programs, disk storage, remote memory, and other resources to module 101 usually through a networked connection. Additional details regarding server 105 are provided in FIG. 1c below. Additional remote computers with which module 101 communicates may include another module 101 or mobile device, an M2M node within a capillary network, a personal computer, other servers, a client, a router, a network PC, a peer device, a base station 103, or other common network node. It will be appreciated that the network connections shown throughout the present invention are exemplary and other means of establishing a wireless or wired communications link may be used between mobile devices, computers, servers, corresponding nodes, and similar computers.

The module program 101 i and data reporting steps 101 x operating within module 101 illustrated in FIG. 1b can provide computer executable instructions to hardware such as CPU 101 b through a system bus 101 d in order for a module 101 to (i) collect data from a sensor, (ii) change the state of an actuator 101 y, and (iii) send or receive packets with a server 105, thus allowing server 105 to remotely monitor or control a monitored unit 119. The module program 101 i and/or data reporting steps 101 x can enable the module 101 to transmit or send data from sensor 101 f or module 101 by recording data in memory such as RAM 101 e, where the data can include sensor data, a destination IP:port number, a packet or packet header value, an encryption or ciphering algorithm and key, a digital signature algorithm and key, etc. The data recorded in RAM 101 e can be subsequently read by the operating system 101 h or the device driver 101 g. The operating system 101 h or the device driver 101 g can write the data to a physical interface 101 a using a system bus 101 d in order to use a physical interface 101 a to send data to a server 105 using the Internet 107. Alternatively, the module program 101 i and/or data reporting steps 101 x can write the data directly to the physical interface 101 a using the system bus 101 d.

The module program 101 i and/or data reporting steps 101 x, or operating system 101 h can include steps to process the data recorded in memory such as, but not limited to, encrypting data, selecting a destination address, or encoding sensor data acquired by (i) a sensor 101 f or (ii) through a physical interface 101 a such as, but not limited to, a thermocouple, shock or vibration sensor, light sensor, or global positioning system (GPS) receiver, etc. The module 101 can use the physical interface 101 a such as, but not limited to, a radio to transmit or send the data from a sensor to a base station 103. For those skilled in the art, other steps are possible as well for a module program 101 i or operating system 101 h to collect data from a sensor 101 f and send the data in a packet without departing from the scope of the present invention.

Conversely, in order for module 101 to receive a packet or response from server 105, the physical interface 101 a can use a radio to receive data from a base station 103. The received data can include information from a server 105 and may comprise a datagram, a source IP:port number, a packet or header value, an instruction for module 101, an acknowledgement to a packet that module 101 sent, a digital signature, and/or encrypted data. The operating system 101 h or device driver 101 g can use a system bus 101 d and CPU 101 b to record the received data in memory such as RAM 101 e, and the module program 101 i or operating system 101 h may access the memory in order to process the received data and determine the next step for the module 101 after receiving the data. The steps within this paragraph may also describe the steps a module program 101 i or data reporting steps 101 x can perform in order to receive a packet or a response 209 below. For those skilled in the art, other steps are possible as well for a module program 101 i, data reporting steps 101 x, or module 101 to receive a packet or response from a server 105 within the scope of the present invention.

Moreover, those skilled in the art will appreciate that the present invention may be implemented in other computer system configurations, including hand-held devices, netbooks, portable computers, multiprocessor systems, microprocessor based or programmable consumer electronics, network personal computers, minicomputers, mainframe computers, and the like. The invention may also be practiced in distributed computing environments, where tasks are performed by remote processing devices that are linked through a communications network. In a distributed computing environment, program modules may be located in both local and remote memory storage devices. In addition, the terms “mobile node”, “mobile station”, “mobile device”, “M2M module”, “M2M device”, “networked sensor”, or “industrial controller” can be used to refer to module 101 or its functional capabilities of (i) collecting sensor data regarding a monitored unit 119, (ii) changing state of an actuator 101 y associated with monitored unit 119, and/or (iii) communicating the data associated with a monitored unit 119 with a wireless network 102. The function of module 101 and sensor 101 f could be integrated, and in this case module 101 could also be referred to as a “sensor”, “intelligent sensor”, or “networked sensor”. Further, the term “module” or “monitoring device” can be used to refer to the module program 101 i when module program 101 i provides functional capabilities such as reporting data from a sensor 101 f to a server 105 or receiving instructions for an actuator 101 y from a server 105. Other possibilities exist as well for the configuration or combination of components illustrated in FIG. 1b without departing from the scope of the present invention.

FIG. 1c

FIG. 1c is a graphical illustration of hardware, firmware, and software components for a server, in accordance with exemplary embodiments. The illustrated components for the server 105 in FIG. 1c include a central processing unit (CPU) 105 b, a random access memory (RAM) 105 e, a system bus 105 d, storage 105 m, an operating system 105 h, and a module controller 105 x. These elements can provide functions equivalent to the central processing unit (CPU) 101 b, RAM 101 e, system bus 101 d, flash memory 101 w, and an operating system 101 h described above in FIG. 1b , respectively. In general, a server 105 can have higher-end components such as, but not limited to, a larger CPU 105 b and greater RAM 105 e in order to support communications with a plurality of modules 101. Server 105 can comprise a general purpose computer such as, but not limited to, a rack mounted server within a data center or rack, or could also comprise a desktop computer or laptop. Server 105 could also be a specialized computer, with hardware and software selected for supporting a plurality of modules 101 connecting and communicating simultaneously. Operating system 101 h can comprise an operating system appropriate for a server such as, but not limited to, Linux, Solaris®, or Windows® Server. Server 105 can preferably include at least one wired Ethernet connection with high bandwidth that is persistently connected to the Internet 107, while the Internet 107 connection for module 101 may be transient as module 101 changes between sleep and active states. Module controller 105 x can provide the server-side logic for managing communications and controlling module 101 using a module database 105 k. Application interface 105 i can provide functionality for communicating with external servers or nodes, such as, but not limited to, an application server 171 illustrated in FIG. 1 d.

A module controller 101 x and application interface 105 i may be applications programmed in a language such as, but not limited to, C, C++, Java, or Python and could provide functionality to support M2M applications such as, but not limited to, remote monitoring of sensors and remote activation of actuators. Module controller 105 x and application interface 105 i could also be software routines, subroutines, linked libraries, or software modules, according to preferred embodiments. Many of the logical steps for operation of server 105, module controller 105 x, and/or application interface 105 i can be performed in software and hardware by various combinations of physical interface 105 a, system bus 105 d, device driver 105 g, and operating system 105 h. A module controller 105 x and application interface 105 i can also access a set of cryptographic algorithms 141 (in FIG. 1g below) in order (i) to encrypt and decrypt data, and also (ii) process or generate a digital signature and verify received digital signatures. When server 105 is described herein as performing various actions such as, but not limited to, acquiring an IP address, monitoring a port, transmitting or sending a packet, receiving a message, or encrypting or signing a message, specifying herein that server 105 performs an action can refer to software, hardware, and/or firmware operating within server 105 performing the action. As contemplated herein, when a server 105 is described as performing an action such as, but not limited to, sending a response, receiving a message, verifying a digital signature, decrypting data, etc., in some embodiments a set of servers 105 n can perform the actions for the server 105. In this case, a server 105 could be a member of the set of servers 105 n.

The server 105 may also include a user interface 105 j such as a display (not shown) which could also comprise any type of display devices such as a liquid crystal display (LCD), a plasma display, and an organic light-emitting diode (OLED) display, or a cathode ray tube (CRT). A user interface 105 j for the server 105 may optionally be provided remotely such as, but not limited to, (i) via a web browser or a secure terminal such as, but not limited to, secure shell (SSH) with (ii) another computer operated by an administrator (not shown). A user or administrator may enter commands and information into server 105 through a user interface 105 j, such as, but not limited to, a keypad, keyboard, and a pointing device. In addition, the server 105 may store computer executable instructions such as, but not limited to, module controller 105 x or application interface 105 i on storage 105 m. Storage 105 m may comprise a disk drive, a solid-state drive, an optical drive, or a disk array. Module controller 101 x (i) can manage communications with module 101 or a plurality of modules 101 and (ii) may be downloaded and installed on the server 105. As noted previously and elsewhere herein, module program 101 i and module controller 105 x can preferably interoperate with each other in order to collect sensor data and control an actuator associated with a monitored unit 119.

The application interface 105 i and/or module controller 101 x operating within server 105 illustrated in FIG. 1c can provide computer executable instructions to hardware such as CPU 105 b through a system bus 105 d in order to (i) receive a message from the module 101 and (ii) send a response, wherein the message can include sensor 101 f data and the response can include an acknowledgement of the message and/or an instruction to the module 101. The module controller 105 x can enable the server 105 to send a response to a message from module 101 by recording data associated with module 101 in memory such as RAM 105 e, where the data can include an instruction from module 101, a destination IP:port number, a packet or packet header value, and the data can be processed using an encryption or ciphering algorithm or key, a digital signature algorithm or key, etc.

The application interface 105 i can enable (a) the server 105 to send a datagram, packet, response to a module 101, or an application message to an application server 171 (b) recording data associated (i) a with module 101 or (ii) other M2M service control information in memory such as RAM 105 e, where the data can include information from module 101, a destination IP:port number, a packet or packet header value, and the information could be processed using an encryption or ciphering algorithm or key, a digital signature algorithm or key, etc. The operating system 105 h or the device driver 105 g can write the data from RAM 105 e to a physical interface 105 a using a system bus 105 d and an Ethernet connection in order to send the data via the Internet 107 illustrated in FIG. 1a . Alternatively, the software program 105 i and/or module controller 105 x can write the data directly to the physical interface 105 a using the system bus 105 d.

The server 105 can utilize the physical interface 105 a to receive data from a module 101 and/or application 171 i using a local area network such as Ethernet, although the physical interface 105 a of server 105 could also utilize a wireless connection. The server 105 can listen or monitor for data from the Internet 107 using port number and/or a TCP/UDP socket. The received data from a module 101 can be a message formatted according to an Internet packet or datagram or series of datagrams inside Ethernet packets and include information from a module 101 such as, but not limited to, a source IP address and port number, an identity of the module, sensor data that may be encrypted, and/or a digital signature of the module. The received data from application 171 i can comprise a series of datagrams formatted according to Internet Protocol and/or datagrams inside Ethernet packets. The received data or message from application 171 i can include information regarding application 171 i and/or server 105, such as a source IP address and port number associated with application 171 i and/or application server 171, an identity of the server, actuator instructions or commands for a module 101 that may be encrypted, and a digital signature associated with the application 171 i.

When server 105 receives messages or data, the operating system 105 h or device driver 105 g can record the received data from module 101 or application 171 i via physical interface 105 a into memory such as RAM 105 e. The application interface 105 i or operating system 105 h may subsequently access the memory in order to process the data received. The application interface 105 i and/or module controller 105 x, or operating system 105 h can include steps to process the data recorded in memory and received from the module 101 or application 171 i, such as, but not limited to, parsing the received packet, decrypting data, verifying a digital signature with a key, or decoding sensor data included in a message from the module.

The server 105 and/or application interface 105 i may communicate with application 171 i by sending and receiving packets over a LAN or the Internet 107, using a physical interface 105 a and a wired connection such as Ethernet or possibly a wireless connection as well. The server 105 can use the physical interface 105 a such as an Ethernet connection to send and receive the data from the Internet 107. For those skilled in the art, other steps are possible as well for an application interface 105 i or operating system 105 h within a server 105 to (i) send/receive a packet or message to/from a module 101 and (ii) send/receive a packet or message to/from an application 171 i without departing from the scope of the present invention. Application interface 105 i and module controller 105 x may optionally be combined within a server 105, or alternatively distributed across different physical computers and function in a coordinated manner using a network.

The device drivers 105 g, operating systems 105 h, and/or module controller 105 x could also optionally be combined into an integrated system for providing the server 105 functionality. Although a single physical interface 105 a, device-driver set 105 g, operating system 105 h, module controller 105 x, application interface 105 i, and user interface 105 j are illustrated in FIG. 1c for server 105, server 105 may contain multiple physical interfaces, device drivers, operating systems, software programs, module programs, and/or user interfaces. Server 105 may operate in a distributed environment, such that multiple computers operate in conjunction through a network to provide the functionality of server 105. Also, server 105 may operate in a “virtualized” environment, where server 105 shares physical resources such as a physical CPU 105 b with other processes operating on the same computer. And other arrangements could be used as well, without departing from the invention.

FIG. 1d

FIG. 1d is a graphical illustration of hardware, firmware, and software components for an application server, in accordance with exemplary embodiments. Application server 171 can include application 171 i. Application 171 i can comprise a computer program or collection of computer programs, for managing a plurality of modules 101 using one or more servers 105, including a set of servers 105 n illustrated in FIG. 1h below. Application 171 i can include a web portal 171 j, service controller 171 x, an application database 171 k, and cryptographic algorithms 141. During operation, such as when application 171 i processes data from/to modules 101 through server 105, application 171 i may reside in RAM 171 e within an application server 171. Application 171 i and the associated computer programs may be recorded in storage 171 m so that they may be loaded by operating system 171 h upon the startup of application server 171. Web portal 171 j can comprise a web server such as, but not limited to, Apache and can provide a user interface for a remote user accessing application 171 i via an Internet 107. The web portal 171 j could include web pages for viewing reports from modules 101 and/or servers 105, and also inputting settings for modules 101 by a user. The web pages could include PHP, active server pages, or Java components, in addition to other elements. Data input and stored by application 171 i can be recorded in application database 171 k. The data could be inserted or queried using structured query language (SQL) statements. Cryptographic algorithms 141 are depicted and described in connection with FIG. 1g below.

Application 171 i may be processed by an application server 171 using a CPU 171 b. The illustrated components for the application server 171 in FIG. 1d include a central processing unit (CPU) 171 b, a random access memory (RAM) 171 e, a system bus 171 d, storage 171 m, an operating system 171 h, and an application 171 i. These elements can provide functions equivalent to the central processing unit (CPU) 105 b, RAM 105 e, system bus 105 d, storage 105 m, and an operating system 105 h described above in FIG. 1c , respectively. Application server 171 can comprise a general purpose computer such as, but not limited to, a rack mounted server within a data center or rack, or could also comprise a desktop computer or laptop. Application server 171 could also be a specialized computer, with hardware and software selected for supporting a plurality of servers 105 or modules 101 connecting and communicating simultaneously. Operating system 171 h can comprise an operating system appropriate for a server such as, but not limited to, Linux, Solaris®, or Windows® Server. Application server 171 can preferably have a wired Ethernet connection with high bandwidth that is persistently connected to the Internet 107.

An application 171 i and/or service controller 171 x may be an application programmed in a language such as, but not limited to, C, C++, Java, or Python and could provide functionality to support M2M applications such as, but not limited to, remote monitoring of sensors and remote activation of actuators. Application 171 i can include a service controller 171 x. Application 171 i and/or service controller 171 x could also be a software routine, subroutine, linked library, or software module, according to one preferred embodiment. Application 171 i can include a service controller 171 x, which can provide the functionality or CPU 171 b instructions for the service controller 171 x described in the present invention. Service controller 171 x can include (i) logic for processing alarms from a module 101 (such as, but not limited to, sending out and email or text message to a user), (ii) logic for adjusting actuator 101 y settings based upon data from sensor 101 f, (iii) accepting user input (possibly via web portal 171 j) and then making an associated change in an actuator 101 y setting. Service controller 171 x can also accept input from external applications (not shown) in order to make decisions regarding module 101, sensor 101 f, and/or actuator 101 y.

Service controller 171 x could be included within an enterprise resource planning (ERP) solution such as, but not limited to, SAP® or Oracle® ERP. An external application (not shown) can communicate with the application server 171. As one example, a group of modules 101 could be installed within a manufacturing plant, and when a customer order was entered into the external application such as ERP, the service controller 171 x could provide instructions for a group of modules 101 to server 105, such as, but not limited to, changing actuators 101 y to operate a production line. Other possibilities for service controller 171 x exist as well without departing from the scope of the present invention. In general, service controller 171 x can manage the overall function of a group of modules 101 through server 105. Service controller 171 x may operate at the “user layer” and/or “application layer” of the traditional OSI model.

Many of the logical steps for operation of application server 171 or application 171 i can be performed in software by various combinations of physical interface 171 a, device driver 171 g, operating system 171 h, and module controller 105 i, where application 171 i communicates with module controller 105 i over a network. Application 171 i and module controller 105 i can communicate using an application message 701 (illustrated in FIG. 7 below). When application 171 i is described herein as performing various actions such as, but not limited to, acquiring an IP address, monitoring a port, transmitting or sending a packet or message, or encrypting or signing a message, receiving a packet or message, specifying herein that application 171 i and/or application server 171 performs an action can refer to software, hardware, and/or firmware operating within application server 171 performing the action. Application server 171 or application 171 i can send or transmit a message, packet, or data using the steps depicted and described in connection with FIG. 1c for a server 105 to send or transmit a message, packet, or data. Application server 171 or application 171 i can receive a message, packet, or data using the steps depicted and described in connection with FIG. 1c for a server 105 to receive a message, packet, or data. Application server 171 can utilize hardware components similar to server 105, such as storage 171 m can be similar to storage 105 m, CPU 171 b can be similar to CPU 105 b, and physical interface 171 a can be similar to physical interface 105 a. Application server 171 can use a system bus 171 d to connect the hardware components shown within application server 171, and system bus 171 d can be similar to system bus 105 d depicted and described in connection with FIG. 1c above.

Application server 171 may also comprise a collection of individual computers, where the individual computers could be either centrally located or geographically dispersed, but the individual computers may function in a coordinated manner over a network to operate as an application server 171. In a similar manner, application 171 i may be distributed across a plurality of computers, such as, but not limited to, in a cloud computing configuration. Application server 171 may be a “virtualized” server, with computing resources shared with other processes operating on a computer.

FIG. 1e

FIG. 1e is a graphical illustration of components within a module, in accordance with exemplary embodiments. FIG. 1e is illustrated to show a combination of components useful for leveraging the efficient and secure communication techniques described in the present invention. In addition to the components illustrated in FIG. 1b above, module 101 can include a battery 101 k, a server public key 114, a wireless module private key 112, a connection to an actuator 101 y, a USB interface 101 v, a CPU wake controller 101 u, a flash memory 101 w, a symmetric key 127, a pre-shared secret key 129 a, a random number generator 128, cryptographic algorithms 141, a radio 101 z, and other components illustrated in FIG. 1e . Not all of the components illustrated in FIG. 1e are required for many exemplary embodiments, and some of the components illustrated in FIG. 1e may also be optionally omitted in exemplary embodiments.

The CPU 101 b can comprise a general purpose processor appropriate for the low power consumption requirements of a module 101, and may also function as a microcontroller. A CPU 101 b and a CPU wake controller 101 u are depicted and described in connection with FIG. 1b of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/055,606, filed Oct. 16, 2013 in the name of John Nix, entitled “Systems and Methods for ‘Machine-to-Machine’ (M2M) Communications Between Modules, Servers, and an Application using Public Key Infrastructure (PKI),” which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.

Sensor 101 f could be a device to collect environmental data or data regarding a monitored unit 119. Sensor 101 f could collect data such as, but not limited to, temperature, humidity, pressure, visible light levels, radiation, shock and/or vibration, voltage, current, weight, pH levels, orientation/motion, or the presence of specific chemicals. Sensor 101 f could also be a microphone. Sensor 101 f could be a magnetic strip reader for credit cards and similar cards, or an antenna for either near-field RF communications, such as, but not limited to, reading an RF identity tag. An antenna for a sensor 101 f could also collect longer-range RF signals, such as, but not limited to, reading long-range radio frequency identity tags. Sensor 101 f could also collect biometric data such as, but not limited to, heart rate, glucose levels, body temperature, or other health measurements and in this case monitored unit 119 could be a person. The sensor 101 f can provide data to the CPU 101 b in the form of analog or digital data, which can be communicated via a system bus 101 d or physical interface 101 a and other electrical interfaces are possible as well. A sensor measurement can comprise the analog or digital data collected by CPU 101 b from sensor 101 f. A sensor measurement can include processing of the analog or digital data input CPU 101 b by sensor 101 f, such as, but not limited to, averaging over time, using mathematic formulas to convert the raw data from sensor 101 f into a usable form. Module 101 may also collect sensor data or sensor values using a sensor 101 f and CPU 101 b, where the data or values are derived from electrical signals output by a sensor 101 f. A sensor measurement can comprise the sensor data or sensor values. If module 101 comprises a “point of presence” payment terminal, then a sensor measurement could comprise data read from a payment card.

As contemplated herein, the terms “sensor measurement” and “sensor data” can be used interchangeably, and can also be considered functionally equivalent. Although a single sensor 101 f is shown in FIG. 1e , a module 101 could include multiple sensors. Each of the multiple sensors 101 f could include a sensor identity 151, which could comprise a number or string to identify the sensor 101 f. A sensor 101 f could be external to module 101, and also a plurality of sensors 101 f may be used and they also can connect to module 101 when module 101 uses radio 101 z as a base station for a WiFi network. An exemplary embodiment where sensor 101 f connects to module 101 using a radio 101 z is also depicted and described in connection with FIG. 1e of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/055,606, filed Oct. 16, 2013 in the name of John Nix, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.

Actuator 101 y could be a device to control a parameter or state for a monitored unit 119, such as, but not limited to, changing a voltage or current, activating a switch or relay, turning on or off a microphone or speaker, activating or deactivating a light, and other examples are well known in the art. Actuator 101 y could also be a speaker. Actuator 101 y could be controlled by module 101 via a digital or analog output from CPU 101 b, which could also be transmitted or sent via system bus 101 d or a physical interface 101 a. Although actuator 101 y is illustrated as external to wireless module 101 in FIG. 1e , actuator 101 y could also be internal to module 101, and module 101 could include multiple actuators 101 y. The use of multiple actuators 101 y each with an actuator identity 152 is also depicted and described in connection with FIG. 1e of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/055,606, filed Oct. 16, 2013 in the name of John Nix, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. Sensors and actuators are well known to those of ordinary skill in the art, and thus are not described in additional detail herein.

Module 101 can include a Universal Serial Bus (USB) interface. In accordance with an exemplary embodiment, module 101 can comprise a wireless module and include a radio 101 z. Note that the use of a radio 101 z is not required for module 101, which could also obtain a connection to the Internet 107 via a wired line such as Ethernet. Although not illustrated, radio 101 z could include antennas for reception and transmission of RF signals, and even multiple antennas could be used. Although a single radio 101 z is illustrated in module 101, module 101 could also contain multiple radios 101 z. Radio 101 z can support wireless LAN standards such as, but not limited to, WiFi, Bluetooth, and Zigbee, or similar wireless LAN standards. Radio 101 z illustrated in FIG. 1e can comprise a radio 101 z depicted and described in connection with FIG. 1d of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/039,401, filed Sep. 27, 2013 in the name of John Nix, the contents of which are herein incorporated in their entirety.

Note that module 101 may also operate as a base station in a wireless LAN, such as, but not limited to, an 802.11 base station. When module 101 operates a wireless LAN, radio 101 z can function as either a client/node and/or a base station 103 to support communication from other wireless nodes in physical proximity, such as, but not limited to, other nodes within an exemplary 50 meters. The other wireless nodes could comprise a sensor 101 f and/or actuator 101 y, and in this case a sensor could be referred to as a “networked sensor” and an actuator could be referred to as a “networked actuator”. Radio 101 z functioning as a base station is depicted and described as a base station 103 is depicted and described in connection with FIG. 1d of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/039,401, filed Sep. 27, 2013 in the name of John Nix, the contents of which are herein incorporated in their entirety.

In accordance with exemplary embodiments, module 101 can store module private key 112, server public key 114, and module identity 110, and a symmetric key 127 in memory/RAM 101 e during operation, such as when CPU 101 b is active and the module 101 is connected to a network such as a wireless network 102 during data transmissions. Module private key 112 preferably is recorded in nonvolatile memory such as, but not limited to, flash memory 101 w, so that module 101 has access to its private key 112 after the private key has been derived or loaded, including times when a battery 101 k has been fully drained or removed from module 101 (if module 101 does not utilize a persistent power source such as land-line power).

Symmetric key 127 can be a secure, shared private key for use with symmetric encryption or symmetric ciphering algorithms 141 b (in FIG. 1g below). Symmetric key 127 can be derived by using module public key 111 and/or server public key 114, possibly through the use of a key derivation function 141 f (described in FIG. 1g below). Symmetric key 127 can be used for both encryption and decryption with symmetric cryptographic algorithms 141 b described in FIG. 1g below, where a shared secret key can be used to encrypt/cipher and/or decrypt/decipher. Symmetric key 127 may also include an expiration time 133, such that symmetric key 127 may only be used by module 101 and/or server 105 during a limited period of time, such symmetric key 127 remaining only valid for a day, or a week, or during a session (where the session comprises multiple messages and/or responses between a module 101 and a server 105), etc. Module 101 can also derive symmetric key 127 according the Elliptic Curve Integrated Encryption Scheme (ECIES) and/or ECDH 159, discussed in FIG. 1g below, using module public key 111, server public key 114, and a random number 128 a from random number generator 128. ECIES could be included in cryptographic algorithms 141. A summary of ECIES shared key derivation is described the Wikipedia article “Integrated Encryption Scheme” from Sep. 18, 2013 (herein incorporated by reference). Other possibilities for shared key derivation function using public keys are possible as well, including a Diffie-Hellman key exchange. Using a derived symmetric key from the exemplary key derivation function ECIES, module 101 and/or server 105 could derive a second symmetric key 127 after the expiration time 133 of the first symmetric key 127 had transpired. As contemplated herein, a symmetric key 127 can also comprise a session key, or the use of a “session key” with a symmetric ciphering algorithm 141 b can comprise a symmetric key 127.

Note that a key derivation function 141 f using public keys is not required to generate a shared symmetric key 127, and alternatively a shared symmetric key 127 could be generated by any of module 101, server 105, module provider 109, M2M service provider 108, or application server 171. If module 101 generates shared symmetric key 127 for symmetric ciphering 141 b within a cryptographic algorithms 141, then module 101 can send shared symmetric key 127 to server 105 using an asymmetric ciphering depicted and described in connection with FIG. 4 below. In accordance with a preferred exemplary embodiment, module 101 preferably uses a random number generator 128 to generate a random number 128 a (illustrated in FIG. 1g ) for input into cryptographic algorithms 141, and the seed 129 in random number generator 128 could utilize data from a sensor 101 f in order to generate a random number 128 a with high entropy in the creation of symmetric key 127. Random number generator 128 and random number 128 a are also depicted and described in connection with FIG. 1d of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/039,401, filed Sep. 27, 2013 in the name of John Nix, the contents of which are herein incorporated in their entirety.

Module identity 110 is preferably a unique identifier of module 101, and could comprise a number or string such as, but not limited to, a serial number, an international mobile subscriber identity number (IMSI), international mobile equipment identity (IMEI), or an Ethernet media access control (MAC) address. According to an exemplary embodiment, module identity 110 can also comprise a serial number or string that is written into hardware of module 101 upon manufacturing or distribution of module 101. In this case, module identity 110 could be recorded in a read only memory 101 c, where read only memory 101 c could not be easily erased or otherwise tampered with. Read only memory 101 c could also comprise a protected memory. Or, module 101 could read module identity 110, which could be written into hardware by a manufacturer, distributor, or module provider 109, by using a device driver 101 g that reads a hardware address containing the module identity 110 using the system bus 101 d. Module 101 can read the module identity 110 by accessing a read-only address using the bus 101 d. In either case, in one embodiment module identity 110 may preferably be permanently or persistently associated with the physical hardware of module 101, which can be helpful for the security procedures contemplated herein. Module identity 110 can function as a basic identifier for services from M2M service provider 108, server 105, and/or application 171 i in order to properly identify module 101 among a plurality of modules. Module private key 112 and module public key 111 could be unique to module 101 and uniquely associated with module identity 110, according to a preferred embodiment.

As contemplated herein, a module identity 110 can also have more than one use. A first module identity 110 could comprise a serial number for the physical hardware of module 101, as described in the paragraph above. A second module identity 110 could also comprise a session identifier, for data sessions between module 101 and server 105, where the session identifier can be uniquely associated by a server 105 to module 101. In the case where module identity 110 has more than one use, format, or representation, the module identity 110 associated with or written into hardware of module 101 (and potentially read from a read-only address in module 101) would preferably comprise the module identity 110 used in a certificate 122. Since a module 101 may utilize multiple module public keys 111 and module private keys 112 over its lifetime, a certificate 122 for module 101 can preferably include both (i) the module identity 110 (such as, but not limited to, a serial number for the physical hardware of module 101) and (ii) a module public key identity 111 a in order to specify the particular module public key 111 associated with certificate 122. The use of a module public key identity 111 a in a certificate 122 is also depicted and described in connection with FIG. 1h of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/055,606, filed Oct. 16, 2013 in the name of John Nix. Since a module 101 may also have multiple public keys 111 for different purposes (such as, but not limited to, one for creating digital signatures, another for asymmetric ciphering, another for use with a second wireless network 102, etc.), then module 101 may also potentially have multiple valid certificates 122 concurrently each with different module public key identities 111 a.

Further, as contemplated herein, a module identity 110 could also comprise more than one physical string or number, such as, but not limited to, a first string when module 101 connects with a first M2M service provider 108 or first wireless network 102, and module identity 110 could comprise a second string when module 101 connects with a second M2M service provider 108 or second wireless network 102. The first M2M service provider 108 or first wireless network 102 may have a first requirement or specification for the format, length, structure, etc. of module identity 110, and the second M2M service provider 108 or second wireless network 102 may have a second requirement or specification for the format, length, structure, etc. of module identity 110.

Server public key 114 in module 101 could be obtained from downloading the key over the Internet 107, or optionally also written into nonvolatile memory of module 101 upon manufacture or distribution. Server public key 114 could be obtained using a domain name or Internet address that is recorded in nonvolatile memory upon the configuration of module 101, such as, but not limited to, during installation or distribution, and module 101 could fetch the server public key 114 upon connecting to a wireless network 102 or other connection to the Internet 107.

Module 101 may also contain cryptographic algorithms 141, which may comprise a suite of algorithms or subroutines that can be utilized for (i) deriving a pair of keys comprising a public key and a private key, (ii) encrypting data using public keys, (iii) decrypting data using private keys, (iv) processing secure hash signatures using private keys, and (v) verifying secure hash signatures using public keys, and related software, firmware, or subroutines for implementing a cryptographic system, including symmetric ciphering algorithms. Cryptographic algorithms 141 (also described below in FIG. 1g ) could utilize publicly available software libraries within tools such as, but not limited to, OpenSSL maintained by The OpenSSL Project, libgcrypt maintained by The Free Software Foundation, and similar libraries such as, but not limited to, libmcrypt and Crypto++. Note that cryptographic algorithms 141 could also use proprietary cryptographic libraries as well. In addition to implementing asymmetric encryption/ciphering, such as, but not limited to, used with RSA and ECC cryptography, cryptographic algorithms 141 can provide symmetric ciphering where a shared private key is utilized to both encrypt and decrypt, such as, but not limited to, with the Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) cipher suite.

As illustrated in FIG. 1e , module 101 may also contain a random number generator 128. Random number generator 128 may contain a seed 129. The creation of random numbers with a high degree of entropy may be important the use of cryptographic algorithms 141. A plurality of the data as a source for a random number seed 129 could be appended together into a “module random seed file” 139 (illustrated in FIG. 1g ) with a combined series or list of states (i.e. a plurality of sensor 101 f measurements, radio 101 z measurements, clock times, memory 101 e or memory 101 w states, operating system 101 h states, actuator 101 y states, and/or hardware 101 a or 101 d states). Note that values or data for each of the elements listed in the previous sentence could be utilized in a “module random seed file” 139 instead of or in addition to a state. The “module random seed file” is also depicted and described in connection with FIG. 1e of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/055,606, filed Oct. 16, 2013 in the name of John Nix, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety

Note that the term “public key” as contemplated herein includes a key that may be shared with other elements, where the other elements may not be under the direct control of the same entity that holds the corresponding private key. However, the term “public key” as used herein does not require that the public key is made available to the general public or is publicly disclosed. An additional layer of security may be maintained in the present invention by preferably only sharing public keys on a confidential basis with other entities. For example, module public key 111 may be created by module 101 when generating module private key 112, and module 101 may share module public key 111 with M2M service provider 108 in order to record module public key 111 in server 105, but module 101 could choose to not share module public key 111 with other entities, such as wireless network 102 or provide a certificate 122 with module public key 111 publicly available on the Internet 107. The benefits of confidentially sharing module public key 111 with server 105 are also further described below.

Although a single public key and private key for (i) module 101 and (ii) server 105 are illustrated in FIG. 1e and also FIG. 1f below, respectively, both module 101 and server 105 may each utilize several different pairs of public keys and private keys. As one example, module 101 may record a first private key 112 used for creating a digital signature and a second private key 112 for decryption using asymmetric ciphering algorithms 141 a. In this example, a server 105 could utilize a first module public key 111 to verify the digital signature, and a second module public key 111 could be utilized to encrypt messages sent to module 101. Similarly, either module 101 or server 105 may use private key 112 or 105 c, respectively, to derive secondary shared keys such as, but not limited to, a derived shared key 129 b below. Thus, one key pair could be used with digital signatures, a second key pair used for asymmetric ciphering, and a third key pair to derive shared secret keys. Each of the three illustrated pairs of keys could comprise a set of keys, and each of the illustrated pairs of keys could also use a different set of cryptographic parameters 126 (illustrated in FIG. 1g below), although the cryptographic parameters 126 for the various pairs of keys could also be the same.

In addition, module 101 could utilize a first set of keys to communicate with a first server 105 and a second set of keys to communicate with a second server 105. The first set of keys could use or be associated with a first set of cryptographic parameters 126 and the second set of keys could use or be associated with a second set of cryptographic parameters 126. According to exemplary embodiments, module 101 may also include a pre-shared secret key 129 a. Pre-shared secret key 129 a can comprise a secret key that is shared between module 101 and server 105 before module 101 begins (i) communicating with server 105 and/or a certificate authority 118, (ii) or utilizing PKI-based encryption and authentication to communicate with M2M service provider 108. As illustrated in FIG. 1f below, server 105 could also record the pre-shared secret key 129 a, and a pre-shared secret key 129 a can be associated with each module 101 using a module identity 110. A pre-shared secret key 129 a is also depicted and described in connection with U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/055,606, filed Oct. 16, 2013 in the name of John Nix, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. In an exemplary embodiment, once the pre-shared secret key 129 a has been utilized to authenticate or verify a module public key 111 with a server 105 (such as, but not limited to, using subsequent steps 517 in FIG. 5b below), then that particular pre-shared secret key 129 a may be “discarded” and not used again for security purposes contemplated herein.

Note that the use of a pre-shared secret key 129 a and pre-shared secret key code 134 is also optional, such that a module program 101 i could cipher of obfuscate the initial submission of a derived module public key 111 and module identity to a server 105, so that server 105 could be reasonably assured only a valid module 101 submitted the module public key 111. According to a preferred exemplary embodiment, module 101 can derive its own module private key 112 and module public key 111, and utilize pre-shared secret key 129 a in order to securely and/or authoritatively communicate the derived module public key 111 with server 105 and/or a certificate authority 118. The use of pre-shared secret key 129 a can be particularly useful if module 101 has already been deployed with a monitored unit 119 and connects to server 105 though the Internet 107 for the very first time. Server 105 could preferably utilize pre-shared secret key 129 a in order to confirm that a received module public key 111 and module identity 110 from module 101 authoritatively belong to module 101, as opposed to being an unauthorized or even fraudulent submission of module public key 111 and module identity 110.

Server 105 could utilize a pre-shared secret key 129 a and the steps depicted and described in connection with FIG. 4 below in order to securely receive module public key 111 and module identity 110 from module 101, including the first time module 101 sends module public key 111 to server 105.

As one example, pre-shared secret key 129 a could be utilized as a symmetric ciphering 141 b key, described in FIG. 1g below. After the first submission of module public key 111 to server 105, any subsequent submissions of new module public keys 111 derived by module 101 could either (i) continue to use the pre-shared secret key 129 a, or (ii) use a symmetric key 127 derived after the first module public key 111 has been received. Securing the submission of module public key 111 with server 105, including both the first submission and subsequent submissions, is also depicted and described in connection with FIG. 5b below.

FIG. 1f

FIG. 1f is a graphical illustration of components within a server, in accordance with exemplary embodiments. Server 105 can include a module database 105 k, a sub-server 105 w, and a message preprocessor 105 y. In an exemplary embodiment, the elements illustrated within a server 105 in FIG. 1f may be stored in volatile memory such as RAM 105 e, and/or storage 105 m, and may also be accessible to a processor CPU 105 b. In another exemplary embodiment, the module database 105 k, sub-server 105 w, and message processor 105 y can comprise separate computers. Module database 105 k, sub-server 105 w, and message preprocessor 105 y could represent either different processes or threads operating on a server 105, or physically separate computers operating in conjunction over a network to perform the functions of a server 105. Since server 105 can preferably support communications with a plurality of modules 101, server 105 can utilize module database 105 k to store and query data regarding a plurality of modules 101, monitored units 119, and the overall M2M service. The server 105 can store a plurality of module public keys 111 associated with a plurality of devices in the module database 105 k. The server 105 can use the module identity 110 of device 101, received in a message such as, but not limited to, a UDP packet, to query the module database 105 k and select the public key 111 or symmetric key 127 associated with the module 101.

Although not illustrated in FIG. 1f , module database 105 k can also record a pre-shared secret key code 134, a set of cryptographic parameters 126, and a module identity 110 for each module 101, along with the pre-shared secret key 129 a shown in FIG. 1f . In addition, although not illustrated in FIG. 1f , module database 105 k could store a symmetric key 127 for each module 101, if cryptographic algorithms 141 utilize a symmetric cipher 141 b such as, but not limited to, AES for communication with module 101. Examples of module database 105 k could include MySQL, Oracle®, SQLite, hash tables, distributed hash tables, text files, etc. Module database 105 k could reside within RAM 105 e or storage 105 m. Server 105 may also record a symmetric key 127, where the symmetric key 127 can be associated with an expiration time 133. Symmetric key 127 can also be recorded in a module database 105 k or a sub-server 105 w.

Message preprocessor 105 y can process incoming packets and route them to an appropriate sub-server 105 w using information contained in an incoming message, such as, but not limited to, a module identity 110, a server identity 206 illustrated in FIG. 2 below, and/or a destination IP address. Message preprocessor 105 y can include rules for processing and routing, such a dropping malformed incoming messages or incoming messages without correct cryptographic data. Message preprocessor 105 y could also optionally be combined with a server firewall 124 in order to provide firewall functionality and security at the network layer. Message preprocessor 105 y may preferably remain “silent” to incoming packets without proper cryptographic data contained in an incoming message, such as, but not limited to, one example of a properly formatted message 208 illustrated in FIG. 6a below.

Sub-server 105 w can include a server private key 105 c and cryptographic algorithms 141. A plurality of sub-servers 105 w can be utilized by a server 105 in order to support communication with a plurality of modules 101. The server private key 105 c and module public key 111 can be utilized by server 105 to secure communication with module 101, including the steps depicted and described in connection with FIG. 4 and FIG. 5a below. Cryptographic algorithms 141 may comprise a suite of algorithms or subroutines and are depicted and described in connection with FIG. 1 g.

A first sub-server 105 w can process messages and responses with a first module 101 using a first set of security keys and algorithms, such as, but not limited to, using RSA-based security, and a second sub-server 105 w can process messages and responses with a second module 101 using a second set of security keys and algorithms, such as, but not limited to, using ECC-based security. Consequently, message pre-processor 105 y could route incoming messages to the appropriate sub-server 105 w depending on the encryption algorithm used in the incoming message (which could be determined by message pre-processor 105 y by querying the module database 105 k using a module identity 110 in the incoming message 208, where module identity 110 can be used to select a sub-server 105 w). Sub-servers 105 w may utilize separate server private keys 105 c, or the sub-servers 105 w can share a common private key 105 c. Sub-servers 105 w may utilize separate cryptographic algorithms 141, or the sub-servers 105 x can share common cryptographic algorithms 141. Although separate sub-servers 105 w are illustrated in FIG. 1f , the sub-servers may optionally be combined with a server 105, or omitted, with the corresponding server private key 105 c and cryptographic algorithms 141 stored directly in a server 105.

Server 105 may also comprise a collection of individual computers, where the individual computers could be either centrally located or geographically dispersed, but the individual computers may function in a coordinated manner over a network to operate as a server 105. Server 105 may be a “virtualized” server, with computing resources shared with other processes operating on a computer.

FIG. 1g

FIG. 1g is a graphical illustration of components in a set of cryptographic algorithms, in accordance with exemplary embodiments. As contemplated herein, communications between (i) a module 101 and a server 105, and (ii) between application 171 i and server 105 can be secured by using cryptographic algorithms 141. The cryptographic algorithms 141 used by module 101, server 105, application server 171, and/or application 171 i can comprise a set of steps, procedures, or software routines for accomplishing steps to cipher, decipher, sign, and verify messages, including the generation of public keys, private keys, and derived shared keys. Cryptographic algorithms 141 can be implemented in software operating on (i) module 101 in the form of a module program 101 i, (ii) server 105 in the form of a module controller 105 x, or (iii) application server 171 in the form of an application 171 i. Example software for a cryptographic algorithms 141 includes the libraries within the openssl, libmcrypt, and/or and Crypto++ discussed in FIG. 1e . Other possibilities for the location of cryptographic algorithms within a module 101, server 105, or application 171 i exist as well, including possibly module operating system 101 h, server operating system 105 h, and application server operating system 171 h, respectively.

In addition, cryptographic algorithms 141 may be implemented in hardware or firmware on any of module 101, server 105, or application 171 i. Note that module 101, server 105 and application 171 i could each utilize a different set of cryptographic algorithms 141, although the sets of algorithms should preferably be fully interoperable (i.e. ciphering with a first symmetric ciphering algorithm 141 b and a symmetric key 127 on module 101 could be deciphered by a second symmetric ciphering algorithm 141 b on server 105 using the symmetric key 127, etc.). As illustrated in FIG. 1g , cryptographic algorithms 141 may comprise an asymmetric ciphering algorithm 141 a, a symmetric ciphering algorithm 141 b, a secure hash algorithm 141 c, a digital signature algorithm 141 d, a key pair generation algorithm 141 e, a key derivation function 141 f, and a random number generator 128.

Asymmetric ciphering algorithms 141 a can comprise algorithms utilizing public key infrastructure (PKI) techniques for both (i) encrypting with a public key and (ii) decrypting with a private key. Example algorithms within asymmetric algorithms 141 a include the RSA algorithms 153 and the Elliptic Curve Cryptography (ECC) algorithms 154, and other asymmetric algorithms could be utilized as well. For example, either the ECC algorithms 154 or RSA algorithms 153 can be used for encryption and decryption, including (i) encryption step 503 discussed below, as well as (ii) decryption step 413 discussed below. A set of cryptographic parameters 126 can include input into asymmetric ciphering algorithms 141 a, such as, but not limited to, specifying key lengths, elliptic curves to utilize (if ECC), modulus (if RSA) or other parameters or settings required. As contemplated herein and described in additional detail below, the algorithms illustrated in FIG. 1g can perform both ciphering and deciphering, using the appropriate keys.

The use and application of RSA algorithms and cryptography are described within IETF RFC 3447 titled “Public-Key Cryptography Standards (PKCS) #1: RSA Cryptography Specifications Version 2.1”, herein incorporated by reference, among other published standards for the use of RSA algorithms 153. The use of an RSA algorithm 153 for encryption and decryption, including with cryptographic algorithm and other description of encryption or decryption algorithms, can also be processed according to the description of the RSA algorithm according to the Wikipedia entry for “RSA (algorithm)” as of Sep. 9, 2013, which is incorporated by reference herein.

The use and application of ECC algorithms 154 for asymmetric ciphering algorithms 141 a within cryptographic algorithms 141 are described within IETF RFC 6090 titled “Fundamental Elliptic Curve Cryptography Algorithms” (herein incorporated by reference), among other published standards using ECC. ECC algorithms 154 can also utilize elliptic curve cryptography algorithms to the Wikipedia entry for “Elliptic curve cryptography” as of Sep. 9, 2013, which is incorporated by reference herein. ECC algorithms 154 may utilized according to exemplary preferred embodiments in order to maintain high security with smaller key lengths, compared to RSA, thereby helping to comparably reduce the message lengths, radio frequency spectrum utilization, and processing power required by module 101. Thus, the use of ECC algorithms 154 within various steps requiring ciphering or digital signatures may help conserve battery life of module 101 while maintaining the objective of securing system 100. Note that as contemplated herein, other algorithms besides with ECC algorithms 154 and RSA algorithms 153 may be also be used in asymmetric algorithms 141 a.

Cryptographic algorithms 141 may also include a set of symmetric ciphering algorithms 141 b. Symmetric ciphering algorithms 141 b can utilize a symmetric key 127 by one node such as a module 101 to encrypt or cipher data, and the encrypted data can be decrypted or deciphered by server 105 also using the symmetric key 127. Examples of symmetric ciphers include Advanced Encryption Standard 155 (AES), as specified in Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPS) Publication 197, and Triple Data Encryption Standard (Triple DES), as described in NIST Special Publication 800-67 Revision 1, “Recommendation for the Triple Data Encryption Algorithm (TDEA) Block Cipher (Revised January 2012)”. Cryptographic parameters 126 input into symmetric ciphering algorithms 141 b can include symmetric key 127 length, such as, but not limited to, the selection of 128, 192, or 256 bits with AES 155 symmetric ciphering, and cryptographic parameters 126 could also select a symmetric ciphering algorithm in a collections of symmetric ciphering algorithms 141 b. Other examples of symmetric ciphering algorithms 141 b may be utilized as well within cryptographic algorithms 141. Also note that as contemplated herein, the term “symmetric ciphering” contemplates the use of a symmetric ciphering algorithm 141 b in order to encrypt or cipher data with a symmetric ciphering algorithm 141 b, and “asymmetric ciphering” contemplated the use of an asymmetric ciphering algorithm 141 a to encrypt or cipher data with a public key, such as module public key 111 or server public key 114.

Cryptographic algorithms 141 may also include a set of secure hash algorithms 141 c in order to compute and output a secure hash value or number based on a string or file input into the secure hash algorithms 141 c. Example secure hash algorithms include SHA256 156 (also known as SHA-2) and SHA-3 157. SHA256 156 is specified in the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) Federal Information Processing Standards Publication (FIPS PUB) 180-2 titled “Secure Hash Standard”. SHA-3 157 is scheduled to be published in FIPS PUB 180-5. Cryptographic parameters 126 input into secure hash algorithms 141 c can include the selection of the length of the secure hash, such as, but not limited to, using 224, 256, or 512 bits with either SHA-2 or SHA-3, and other possibilities exist as well.

Cryptographic algorithms 141 may also include a set of digital signature algorithms 141 d, in order to sign and verify messages between (i) module 101 and server 105 or (ii) server 105 and application 171 i. Digital signature algorithms 141 d can also verify signatures such as, but not limited to, comparing that (i) a first secure hash value in the form of a digital signature in a certificate (not shown) using a certificate authority public key matches (ii) a second secure hash value in the certificate (not shown). Digital signature algorithms 141 d can utilize algorithms in National Institute of Standards (NIST) “FIPS 186-4: Digital Signature Standard”, or IETF RFC 6979 titled “Deterministic Usage of the Digital Signature Algorithm (DSA) and Elliptic Curve Digital Signature Algorithm (ECDSA)”. The use of ECDSA algorithm 158 within a set of digital signature algorithms 141 d may be preferred if keys such as, but not limited to, module public key 111 and server public key 114 are based on elliptic curve cryptography. Other PKI standards or proprietary techniques for securely verifying digital signatures may be utilized as well in digital signature algorithms 141 d. Cryptographic parameters 126 input into digital signature algorithms 141 d can include the selection of a secure hash algorithms 141 c to utilize with digital signature algorithms 141 d, or the algorithm to utilize, such as, but not limited to, ECDSA shown or an RSA-based alternative for digital signatures is possible as well. Cryptographic parameters 126 input into digital signature algorithms 141 d can also include a padding scheme for use with a digital signature algorithms 141 d. Digital signature algorithms 141 d could also include an RSA digital signature algorithm for use with RSA-based public and private keys.

Cryptographic algorithms 141 may also include key pair generation algorithms 141 e, a key derivation function 141 f, and a random number generator 128. Key pair generation algorithms 141 e can be utilized by module 101, server 105, or application 171 i to securely generate private and public keys. The key pair generation algorithms 141 e can also use input from a cryptographic parameters 126, such as, but not limited to, the desired key lengths, or a value for an ECC curve if the public key will support ECC algorithms 154. According to an exemplary preferred embodiment, module 101 can derive a pair of module public key 111 and module private key 112 using key pair generation algorithms 141 e. Software tools such as, but not limited to, openssl and libcrypt include libraries for the generation key pairs, and these and similar libraries can be used in a key pair generation algorithm 141 e.

Key derivation function 141 f can be used by module 101, server 105, and/or application 171 i in order to determine a common derived shared secret key 129, using at least two respective public keys as input, and may also include the input of a private key. A key exchange to share a common symmetric key 127 can be performed using a key derivation function 141 f and cryptographic parameters 126. An exemplary algorithm within a key derivation function 141 f can be the Diffie-Hellman key exchange, which is used by tools such as, but not limited to, secure socket layer (SSL) with RSA algorithms 153. When using ECC algorithms 154, module 101 and server 105 can utilize Elliptic Curve Diffie-Hellman (ECDH) algorithms 159, and a summary of ECDH is included in the Wikipedia article titled “Elliptic Curve Diffie-Hellman” Other algorithms to derive a shared secret key 129 b using public keys and a private key may also be utilized in a key derivation function 141 f, such as, but not limited to, the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) standard X-9.63 160. Cryptographic parameters 126 used with key derivation function 141 f with elliptic curve cryptography can include a common base point G for two node using the key derivation function 141 f and public keys. The base point G in a cryptographic parameters 126 can be transmitted or sent from a module 101 to a server 105 in a message 208, and the base point G can be sent from a server 105 to a module 101 in a response 209, and other possibilities exist as well. Cryptographic parameters 126 can also include other or additional information for using a key derivation function 141 f in order to derive a commonly shared symmetric key 127.

Cryptographic parameters 126 input into key pair generation algorithms 141 e can include the type of asymmetric ciphering algorithms 141 a used with the keys, the key length in bits, an elliptic curve utilized for ECC, a time-to-live for a public key that is derived, and similar settings. Additional cryptographic parameters 126 for a public key can include a supported point formats extension, where the supported point formats extension could comprise uncompressed, compressed prime, or “compressed char2” formats, as specified in ANSI X-9.62. In other words, an ECC public key can have several formats and a set of cryptographic parameters 126 can be useful to specify the format. Although a set of cryptographic parameters 126 is illustrated in FIG. 1g as internal to cryptographic algorithms 141, parameters 126 could be recorded in other locations in a module 101 or a system 100. As one example, a set of cryptographic parameters 126 could be recorded in a server 105 and downloaded by module 101 using the Internet 107. The various algorithms within cryptographic algorithms 141 may utilize a random number generator 128, which is also depicted and described in connection with FIG. 1 e above. As contemplated herein, the term “cryptographic parameters” 126 may be considered equivalent to a “set of cryptographic parameters” 126, and also use of the terms “parameters” 126 and “set of parameters” 126 can both refer to the cryptographic parameters 126 illustrated in FIG. 1 g.

According to a preferred exemplary embodiment, cryptographic parameters 126 can include values to define an elliptic curve and/or use ECC algorithms 154. A set of ECC parameters 137 could comprise values or numbers for an elliptic curve defining equation. ECC parameters 137 are also depicted and described in FIG. 1g of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/055,606, filed Oct. 16, 2013 in the name of John Nix, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. Cryptographic parameters 126 could also include an ECC standard curve 138, which could comprise a name and/or values for a standardized curve, such as, but not limited to, the list of named curves included in section 5.1.1 of IETF RFC 4492 titled “Elliptic Curve Cryptography (ECC) Cipher Suites for Transport Layer Security (TLS).”

As contemplated herein, a set of cryptographic algorithms 141 may operate using either strings or numbers, and cryptographic parameters 126 could include either strings or numbers as well. As contemplated herein (i) a collection, sequence, and/or series of numbers could comprise a string, (ii) a string can include a mixture of numbers and characters, or (iii) a string can comprise a collection, sequence, and/or series of characters. The processing of cryptographic algorithms within a module 101 can take place within a CPU 101 b, or module 101 could also process cryptographic algorithms in a cryptographic processing unit (not shown) connected to the system bus 101 d. According to an exemplary embodiment, a module 101 or a server 105 could include a cryptographic processing unit (not shown) separate from the CPU 101 b or CPU 105 b in order to increase efficiency for supporting the use of cryptography through a system 100. Alternatively, in exemplary embodiments cryptographic algorithms 141 can be implemented entirely in software within a module 101 and/or server 105, and also utilized by a module controller 101 x and application interface 101 i.

FIG. 1h

FIG. 1h is a graphical illustration of an exemplary system that includes a user, an application, a set of servers, and a set of modules, in accordance with exemplary embodiments. System 199 illustrated in FIG. 1h can include a user 183, an application 171 i, a set of servers 105, and a set of modules 101, which can communicate as illustrated using the Internet 107. Each of a server A 105 and server B 105 and additional servers can communicate with a plurality of modules. An application 171 i can communicate with a plurality of servers 105. Although the servers 105 and application 171 i in system 100 in FIG. 1i are illustrated as being separate, application 171 i and server 105 may optionally be combined into a single node, such that the application 171 i and server 105 operate as separate processes or programs on the same computer, or on a computer operating in a distributed environment such as, but not limited to, a cloud configuration. In addition, even though a single application 171 i and a single user 183 are illustrated in FIG. 1i , a system 199 could include multiple applications 171 i and multiple users 183. In exemplary embodiments, application server 171 and/or application 171 i can communicate with multiple servers 105 using the multiple secure connection data transfer 802 links illustrated in FIG. 1h . A secure connection data transfer 802 is depicted and described in connection with FIG. 8 below. In addition, in exemplary embodiments, a first server A 105 can communicate with a second server B 105 also by using a secure connection data transfer 802.

As illustrated in FIG. 1h , a first server A 105 and a second server B 105 could also share a module database 105 k, such that information recorded in a module database 105 k by the first server A 105 could be accessible to or queried by a second server B 105. The connection between the servers and the module database 105 k could also be through a secure connection data transfer 802 which is depicted and described in connection with FIG. 8. In this manner and as contemplated herein, a module database 105 k can comprise a shared module database 105 k. Other configurations are possible as well without departing from the scope of the present invention for using a shared module database 105 k. In another embodiment a shared module database 105 k could be combined with application server 171 or shared module database 105 k could comprise a distributed hash table. In exemplary embodiments, a system 199 could also include a plurality of shared module databases 105 k, wherein the shared module databases 105 k could be either (i) be periodically synchronized, or (ii) record separate information for a system 199. A shared module database 105 k could also comprise a plurality of separate module databases 105 k, such that different information may be recorded in each module database 105 k. With the use of separate module databases 105 k, a first module database 105 k could record data associated with a first module 101, and a second module database could record data associated with a second module 101. A server 105 could access each of the first module database 105 k and the second module database 105 k, possibly through a secure connection data transfer 802, in order to support communication with a plurality of modules 101.

User 183 can comprise an individual, business manager, network engineer, systems administrator, other employee with functional responsibilities for a system 199 (or components within a system 199 or system 100) accessing application 171 i using a computer with a user interface such as, but not limited to, a web browser 183 a. Application 171 i could also send an email or text message to user 183 if an alarm condition is detected in system 199, such as, but not limited to, if a sensor 101 f measurement exceeds a prescribed threshold value. The web browser 183 a could use a connection 184 to access a web portal 171 j operating on application 171 i. Connection 184 could include hypertext markup language (HTML) messages, and could be through a secure connection such as, but not limited to, TLS or IPsec, although other possibilities exist as well to those of ordinary skill in the art. Any module 101, such as, but not limited to, module 101 A, could use the Internet 107 and establish a primary connection 181 with server 105 A, and also module 101 A could establish a backup connection 182 with server 105 B if the primary connection 181 is not available. Alternatively, any module 101, such as, but not limited to, module 101 A, could communicate with more than one server 105 concurrently or in sequence, such that module 101 A communicates with both server A 105 and server B 105. According to exemplary embodiments, during an active state between periods of sleep or being dormant, module 101 may communicate with more than one server 105, such as, but not limited to, a first server A 105 and a second server B 105. Other possibilities for a plurality of modules 101 to communicate with a plurality of servers 105 exist without departing from the scope of the present invention.

As contemplated herein a system 199 and other systems illustrated in additional Figures can include a set of servers 105 n, and the exemplary system illustrated in system 199 includes at least two servers 105 in the set of servers 105 n. Other servers besides a server 105 can be included in a set of servers 105 n, such as, but not limited to, shared module database 105 k which could operate on separate computers than a server 105. Other possibilities exist as well for the number of servers 105 in a set of servers 105 n. In another embodiment, the set of servers 105 n could comprise a single server 105. Thus, a set of servers 105 n can include from one to many servers 105.

FIG. 2

FIG. 2 is a graphical illustration of an exemplary system, where a module sends a message to a server, and where the server responds to the message, in accordance with exemplary embodiments. Module 101 as depicted and described in FIG. 2 can operate as a wireless module 101, although a wired connection to the Internet 107 could alternatively be utilized. System 100 as illustrated in FIG. 2 includes RF signals 201, module IP address 202, port number 203, module IP:port 204, server port number 205, server ID 206, server IP:port number 207, message 208, response 209, wireless network firewall address 210, and firewall port binding packet 211. Many of the elements illustrated within system 100 in FIG. 2 are also depicted and described in connection with FIG. 2 of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/039,401 (the contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety). As contemplated herein, a wireless module 101 can comprise a module 101, or in other words a wireless module 101 may be a module 101 that is wireless. Functions described as being performed by a wireless module 101 may also be performed by a wired module 101 (where connection to a wired network would be used instead of connection to a wireless network 102). Also as contemplated herein and illustrated in FIG. 2, the wording “module 101 sends a message 208” can also be considered equivalent to “server 105 receives a message 208”. Likewise, the wording “server 105 sends a response 209” can be considered equivalent to “module 101 receives a response 209”.

A wireless module 101 can wake from a dormant state in order perform (i) remote and automated monitoring and (ii) control functions such as, but not limited to, collecting a sensor 101 f measurement, communicating with server 105, and controlling an actuator 101 y. If module 101 is connected to land-line power or a long-lasting external power source such solar power, then module 101 may remain in an active state and bypass a dormant state, although transmitting RF signals 201 may preferably only be utilized when communicating with wireless network 102 or sending data to and receiving data from server 105. The wireless module can acquire an IP address 202 from the wireless network 102. IP address 202 is illustrated as being an IPv6 address, but IP address 202 could also be an IPv4 address.

In order to transmit or send data from wireless module 101 to server 105, a wireless module 101 can use module program 101 i to collect data from a sensor 101 f in order to update server 105. Module program 101 i can request a port number 203 from operating system 101 h in order to have a source IP:port for sending data using IP protocols such as, but not limited to, TCP and UDP. The terminology “IP:port” as described herein refers to combining an IP address with a port number. Wireless module IP address 202 and port number 203 can be combined to form IP:port number 204. IP:port number 204 can be utilized as a source IP:port number for packets transmitted from wireless module 101, as well as a destination IP:port number for packets received by wireless module 101, when communicating with server 105.

In order to utilize Internet 107, module 101 may also need a destination IP address and port number in order to send packets to server 105. Before sending data to server 105, wireless module 101 preferably retrieves server IP address 106 and server port number 205 from RAM 101 e. Server IP address 106 could be recorded in RAM 101 e via (i) a DNS query using server name 206 or (ii) queries to M2M service provider 108 or wireless network 102. CPU 101 b may copy server IP address 106 and server port number 205 from nonvolatile memory into volatile memory such as, but not limited to, a register for processing to send a packet to server 105. Server name 206 could also be a server identity. (A) Server IP address 106 or server name 206 and (B) server port number 205 could be recorded in a nonvolatile memory such as, but not limited to, flash memory 101 w so that wireless module 101 can store the proper destination of packets transmitted or sent even when wireless module is dormant or shutdown, which avoids the processing and bandwidth requirements of obtaining server IP address 106 and server port number 205 every time the wireless module 101 wakes from the dormant or shutdown state. Server IP address 106 and server port number 205 can be combined into a server IP:port number 207.

After collecting data from a sensor, module 101 can send a packet from IP:port 204 to IP:port 207, and the packet could comprise a message 208 that may include the data from a sensor 101 f. Note that message 208 does not need to include sensor data, and message could potentially be a periodic registration message or keep-alive message. As contemplated herein, the term “sensor measurement” can refer to data associated with or derived from a sensor 101 f. A sensor measurement, can comprise a string containing data regarding a parameter of a monitored unit 119 and collected by a sensor 101 f. The sensor measurement as sent in a message 208 can also represent a string (alphanumeric, binary, text, hexadecimal, etc.), where the string comprises a transformation or processing of sensor data collected by a CPU 101 b, such including formatting, compressing, or encrypting, encoding, etc. of sensor data. A “sensor measurement” could comprise a plurality of data from a sensor 101 f.

In order to minimize bandwidth and time required for RF signals 201 to be active, module 101 can send the message 208 as a single UDP datagram in accordance with a preferred exemplary embodiment. The single UDP datagram in this embodiment can preferably be the only packet sent from module 101 to server 105 or M2M service provider 108 during a wake state for the module 101 when the radio 101 z is active and transmitting, such as, but not limited to, in a radio resource control (RRC) connected state. In other words, according to this preferred exemplary embodiment, the message 208 sent by module 101 can preferably be the only message or packet sent by the wireless module to the server 105 between dormant periods of module 101. By sending message 208 as a single UDP datagram, both a battery 101 k is conserved and utilization of valuable RF spectrum is reduced. Message 208 could also comprise a series of associated UDP messages.

Also, as contemplated herein, message 208 could comprise a related series of packets, so that message 208 could comprise multiple datagrams. As one example, if TCP is utilized as the transport protocol for message 208, then the series of TCP messages including the initial handshake, one or more packets of payload data, and the closing of the connection could together comprise message 208. As another example, if UDP or UDP Lite is utilized for the transport protocol, and payload data exceeds a maximum transmission unit (MTU) size for the UDP packet and the payload data is spread across multiple packets, then the multiple packets would comprise a message 208. Further, a related series of packets comprising a message 208 could be identified by using the same source IP:port number as either (i) received by server 105 or (ii) sent by module 101. In addition, a related series of packets comprising a first message 208 could be identified as a series of packets sent by module 101 before receiving a response 209 from a server, and packets sent after receiving a response 209 could comprise a second message 208. Other possibilities for a message 208 to comprise multiple packets or datagrams may exist without departing from the scope of the present invention.

The UDP datagram for message 208 could also be formatted according to the UDP Lite protocol, as specified in IETF RFC 3828, which is also incorporated by reference herein. The term “UDP Lite” described in the present invention may also refer to any connectionless protocol widely supported on Internet 107 where checksums may be partially disabled, thereby supporting the transfer of bit errors within a datagram. The advantages of UDP over TCP is that UDP can be quickly sent, while TCP requires a “handshake” with the server which requires more time and bandwidth, which would utilize more energy from battery 101 k. According to an exemplary embodiment, both message 208 and response 209 can be TCP messages. In this exemplary embodiment, message 208 and response 209 could each comprise a series of TCP messages that can include a TCP SYN, SYN ACK, ACK, ACK w/data, FIN ACK, etc.

According to an exemplary embodiment, module 101 sends (and server 105 receives) the same sensor data in multiple copies of the same UDP packet. Each of the multiple copies of the same UDP packet can also optionally be formatted according to the UDP Lite protocol. As one example, wireless module sends three identical copies of the UDP or UDP Lite packet that include the same sensor data. The benefit of sending three copies of UDP Lite include (i) the RF signals 201 received by the base station 103 could include bit errors, which could result in a regular (RFC 768) UDP packet being dropped, since a bit error could result in a UDP checksum mismatch, as received and processed by wireless network 102. Note that the use of checksums is mandatory in IPv6, and thus checksums cannot be fully disabled in IPv6. With UDP Lite packets transmitted by wireless module 101, where the mandatory checksum for IPv6 can cover the packet header, wireless network 102 can forward all packets received, potentially including bit errors, to server 105 over the Internet 107.

Server 105 can receive the multiple copies of the UDP or UDP Lite packets, which could include bit errors received, and server 105 could compare or combine the multiple copies or each individual UDP Lite packet in order to remove bit errors. Note that UDP Lite is not required, and wireless module 101 could send the message 208 using a single UDP packet, or multiple copies of a regular UDP (i.e. non UDP Lite) packet. However, using UDP Lite with multiple packets sent can provide benefits such as if the sensor data is encrypted in the packet, then a single bit error would normally break the receiver's ability to decipher the data using a cryptographic key, unless the encrypted data was channel coded and the channel coding could recover from the bit error in order to present an error-free input of the encrypted data to a deciphering algorithm.

Further, between periods of sleep when a wireless module 101 becomes active and transmits RF signals 201, module 101, which may also comprise a wireless module 101, could send the sensor data in a single UDP Lite packet where the packet includes channel coding, which can also be referred to forward error correction. Forward error correction could also be implemented by sending multiple copies of the same UDP packet. Note that since large segments of message 208 could include encrypted or hashed data, those segments may not be appropriate for compression since the data is often similar to random strings which are not readily compressed. Channel coding techniques for the data in message 208 could include block codes and convolution codes. Block codes could include Reed-Solomon, Golay, BCH, Hamming, and turbo codes. According to a preferred exemplary embodiment, data within message 208 is sent as a UDP Lite packet using a turbo code to correct multiple bit errors within a packet or datagram sent by module 101 and received by server 105.

In system 100 illustrated in FIG. 2, server 105 can use IP:port 207 to receive the packet from wireless module 101 and sent from source IP:port 204 to IP:port 207, and the packet could comprise a message 208 that may include the data from a sensor associated with module 101 or monitored unit 119. As contemplated herein, a message 208 illustrated in FIG. 2 does not need to include sensor data and other data could be transmitted or sent, such as, but not limited to, a server instruction 414 (described in FIG. 4 below), or other data pertaining to module 101 or a monitored unit 119. Note that server 105 can use IP:port 207 to receive a plurality of messages 208 from a plurality of wireless modules 101. Server 105 preferably listens for UDP packets on IP:port 207 or monitors IP:port 207, although TCP packets could be supported as well. If server 105 receives multiple copies of the same UDP packet from module 101, server 105 preferably includes a timer to drop duplicate packets received outside a timer window such as, but not limited to, an exemplary 5 seconds.

After receiving the message 208 and processing the message according to the techniques described below such as, but not limited to, in FIG. 4, server 105 can send a response 209. Since module 101 may belong to a wireless network 102 which includes a firewall 104, the source IP:port of the message 208 received by server 105 could be different from the source IP:port 204 utilized by wireless module 101. The source IP:port in message 208 could be changed if firewall 104 performs network address translation (NAT), as one example. Server 105 may not readily know if a NAT translation has been performed on the message 208. Alternatively, firewall 104 may not perform NAT, but could still block data from the Internet 107 which does not properly match the firewall rules. As one example, firewall 104 could be a symmetric firewall (but without NAT functionality), where only packets from IP:port 207 to IP:port 204 are allowed to pass the firewall after message 208 has been sent by module 101.

In either case, where firewall 104 may or may not perform NAT routing, server 105 preferably sends the response 209 from the server IP:port 207 to the source IP:port it receives in message 208. According to a preferred exemplary embodiment, response 209 is a UDP packet sent from server 105 with (i) a source IP:port 207 and (ii) a destination IP:port equal to the source IP:port received in message 208, as illustrated in packet 209 a. The example use of source and destination IP:ports in message 208 and response 209 are also illustrated in FIG. 6a below. In this manner, the UDP packet can traverse a firewall 104, if firewall 104 is present. If firewall 104 is present and performs NAT routing, then firewall 104 can receive the response 209 and change the destination IP address and port within response 209 to equal IP:port 204.

According to exemplary preferred embodiments, module 101 may also obtain power from a land-line source, such as, but not limited to, a traditional 120 volt wall socket, or possibly power over Ethernet, and other non-transient power sources could be utilized as well. In this case, module 101 may remain persistently connected to the Internet through either a wireless network 102 or a wired connection such as, but not limited to, Ethernet. In other words, module 101 may omit entering periods of sleep or dormancy where inbound packets from the Internet would not be received due to the sleep state of module 101. Consequently in an exemplary embodiment, module 101, which does not sleep for periods longer than a minute, may preferably periodically send a firewall port binding packet 211 from IP:port 204 to IP:port 207 in order to keep ports and addresses within a firewall 104 and/or firewall 124 open to communications between module 101 and server 105. Firewall port binding packet 211 can comprise a packet that is sent periodically using a timer interval that is shorter than the port-binding timeout period 117 on a firewall 104 and firewall 124.

Continuing with this exemplary embodiment where module 101 does not sleep for periods longer than approximately one minute, if UDP is utilized for message 208 and response 209, then a small UDP packet comprising firewall port binding packet 211 can be sent periodically such as, but not limited to, every 45 seconds. If TCP is utilized for message 208 and response 209, then a small TCP packet comprising firewall port binding packet 211 can be sent periodically such as, but not limited to, every 4 minutes. Other possibilities for the timing of sending firewall port binding packet 211 are possible as well. By sending firewall port binding packet 211 periodically, server 105 can send module 101 a response 209, (i) which could include a module instruction 502 as explained in FIG. 5a , at (ii) time intervals between message 208 and response 209 that are longer than the firewall port binding timeout values 117 of firewall 104 and/or firewall 124. Without firewall port binding packet 211, if (A) a response 209 sent from server 105 at an exemplary 180 seconds after receiving message 208, such as, but not limited to, after a firewall port binding timeout value 117 of firewall 104 of an exemplary 60 seconds transpired, then (B) response 209 would be dropped by firewall 104 and the response 209 would not be received by module 101.

FIG. 3

FIG. 3 is a flow chart illustrating exemplary steps for a server to receive a message from a module, in accordance with exemplary embodiments. As illustrated in FIG. 3, FIG. 3 can include steps used by a module controller 105 x in a server 105 as illustrated in FIG. 1c . The processes and operations, including steps for module controller 105 x, described below with respect to all of the logic flow diagrams may include the manipulation of signals by a processor and the maintenance of these signals within data structures resident in one or more memory storage devices. For the purposes of this discussion, a process can be generally conceived to be a sequence of computer-executed steps leading to a desired result.

These steps usually require physical manipulations of physical quantities. Usually, though not necessarily, these quantities take the form of electrical, magnetic, or optical signals capable of being stored, transferred, combined, compared, or otherwise manipulated. It is convention for those skilled in the art to refer to representations of these signals as bits, bytes, words, information, elements, symbols, characters, numbers, points, data, entries, objects, images, files, or the like. It should be kept in mind, however, that these and similar terms are associated with appropriate physical quantities for computer operations, and that these terms are merely conventional labels applied to physical quantities that exist within and during operation of the computer.

It should also be understood that manipulations within the computer are often referred to in terms such as listing, creating, adding, calculating, comparing, moving, receiving, determining, configuring, identifying, populating, loading, performing, executing, storing etc. that are often associated with manual operations performed by a human operator. The operations described herein can be machine operations performed in conjunction with various input provided by a human operator or user that interacts with the computer.

In addition, it should be understood that the programs, processes, methods, etc. described herein are not related or limited to any particular computer or apparatus. Rather, various types of general purpose machines may be used with the following process in accordance with the teachings described herein. The present invention may comprise a computer program or hardware or a combination thereof which embodies the functions described herein and illustrated in the appended flow charts. However, it should be apparent that there could be many different ways of implementing the invention in computer programming or hardware design, and the invention should not be construed as limited to any one set of computer program instructions.

Further, a skilled programmer would be able to write such a computer program or identify the appropriate hardware circuits to implement the disclosed invention without difficulty based on the flow charts and associated description in the application text, for example. Therefore, disclosure of a particular set of program code instructions or detailed hardware devices is not considered necessary for an adequate understanding of how to make and use the invention. The inventive functionality of the claimed computer implemented processes will be explained in more detail in the following description in conjunction with the remaining Figures illustrating other process flows. Further, certain steps in the processes or process flow described in all of the logic flow diagrams below must naturally precede others for the present invention to function as described. However, the present invention is not limited to the order of the steps described if such order or sequence does not alter the functionality of the present invention. That is, it is recognized that some steps may be performed before, after, or in parallel other steps without departing from the scope and spirit of the present invention.

The processes, operations, and steps performed by the hardware and software described in this document usually include the manipulation of signals by a CPU or remote server and the maintenance of these signals within data structures resident in one or more of the local or remote memory storage devices. Such data structures impose a physical organization upon the collection of data stored within a memory storage device and represent specific electrical or magnetic elements. These symbolic representations are the means used by those skilled in the art of computer programming and computer construction to most effectively convey teachings and discoveries to others skilled in the art.

At step 311, the server 105 can record a module public key 111, or a plurality of module keys 111 in a module database 105 k. The module public key 111 could be received in a message 208 according to steps 516 and 517, including authenticating the message 208, as depicted and described in connection with FIG. 5b below. Module public key 111 could also be recorded at step 311 before module 101 connects to the Internet 107 the very first time, and in this case module public key 111 could be recorded in server 105 by M2M service provider 108 or module provider 109. At step 312, the server 105 can open a TCP/UDP socket associated with an IP:port number 207 and listen or monitor for incoming message from modules. At step 313, server 105 can receive a message 208 sent by module 101, using the IP:port number 207. Although not illustrated in FIG. 3, upon the first communication from module 101 by server 105 where the communication could include step 313, according to an exemplary embodiment, module 101 can also send a certificate 122 to server 105, where certificate 122 would normally include module public key 111 and module identity 110. Server 105 could utilize a certificate 122 to verify a module identity 110, as described in FIG. 4 below at step 412.

An exemplary format of message 208 is depicted and described in connection with FIG. 6a below, and other possibilities for a message 208 exist as well. Although not illustrated in FIG. 3, after receiving message 208 at step 313, server 105 may also process any channel coding present in message 208 in order to eliminate any bit errors received. The channel coding could be included in a message 208 that utilizes the UDP Lite protocol in an exemplary embodiment. At step 314, server 105 can decrypt a message 208 using a cryptographic algorithm 141 and one of (i) server private key 105 c, or (ii) a symmetric key 127. Additional details regarding step 314 are depicted and described in connection with FIG. 4 below. At step 315, server 105 can verify that message 208 was sent by module 101 using a module identity 110, module public key 111, and a cryptographic algorithm 141, including verifying a module digital signature 405 discussed in FIG. 4 below. Additional details regarding step 315 are depicted and described in connection with FIG. 4 below. Note that step 315 can take place before step 314 if the module identity 110 and/or a digital signature is not encrypted within message 208 (i.e. a sensor measurement in message 208 could be encrypted but a module identity 110 or digital signature may not be encrypted). Step 315 may optionally be omitted, if a symmetric key 127 is used to cipher data within message 208, such that a module digital signature from module 101 was previously verified when the symmetric key 127 was implemented.

After verifying the identity of module 101 in step 315, at step 316 server 105 can record sensor data or sensor measurements within message 208 in a module database 105 k, if message 208 has a sensor measurement. Note that message 208 may not have a sensor measurement, and in this case step 316 can be skipped, or message 208 may also include other data besides a sensor measurement. Sensor data recorded in module database 105 k can be made available for subsequent processing by server 105 or other servers or applications associated with an M2M service provider 108 in order to manage the function and operation of module 101 or monitored unit 119. As illustrated in FIG. 7 through FIG. 9, received sensor data could also be forwarded by server 105 to an application server 171. Although not illustrated in FIG. 3, in an exemplary embodiment at step 316 server 105 could alternatively forward the sensor data to application 171 i instead of recording the data in module database 105 k.

After receiving message 208, server 105 can process a response 209 at step 317 a. Step 317 a can comprise encrypting an instruction, where the instruction could include an acknowledgement of the message received, a command or setting for an actuator, and/or another control message for module 101. Server 105 can utilize a module public key 111 and cryptographic algorithms 141 in order to encrypt the instruction. Step 317 b can comprise creating a digital signature for the response 209 using the server private key 105 c and cryptographic algorithms 141.

Additional details regarding steps 317 a and 317 b are depicted and described in connection with FIG. 5a below. Note that step 317 a and/or step 317 b may optionally be omitted, such that response 209 is transmitted without encryption and/or a signature, and security could be obtained through other means, such as through firewalls 104 and 124, or using a secured network link between module 101 and server 105, such as, but not limited to, setting up a virtual private network (VPN) or SSH tunnel between the two endpoints. These alternative means for security at the network layer would likely require additional bandwidth and power consumption for a module 101 and thus may not be adequately efficient. As one example, if module 101 is a wireless module that sleeps for relatively long periods such as, but not limited to, every hour (and obtains a new IP address for every wake period), setting up a new VPN between module 101 and server 105 in order to receive send a message from module 101 may not be practical due to the extra drain on a battery 101 k for re-establishing the VPN. Or, only portions of steps 317 a and 317 b could be used, such that a response 209 (or a message 208 received in step 313) is not encrypted but a digital signature is used in the response 209 (or message 208).

After completing steps 317 a and 317 b, at step 209 a, server 105 can send response 209 from (a) the source port utilized to receive message 208 to (b) a destination IP:port. The destination IP:port can comprise the source IP:port in message 208 as received by server 105, and the destination IP:port can represent the external interface of a firewall 104. In other words, server 105 may send response 209 from server IP:port 207 to the source IP:port received in message 208, which could represent the source IP:port on a wireless network firewall 104, wherein the source IP:port on the wireless network firewall 104 contains the firewall IP address 210. The wireless network firewall 104 could forward the response 209 to module IP:port 204. As contemplated herein, server 105 can send response 209 as soon as practical after receiving message 208, and in any case response 209 should be sent before the expiration of a firewall port binding timeout value 117 associated with firewall 104. According to a preferred exemplary embodiment, response 209 is sent by server 105 within no more than 5 seconds of receiving message 208. After completing step 209 a as illustrated in FIG. 3b , server 105 can return to step 312 and listen for or monitor for additional incoming messages 208 from modules 101.

FIG. 4

FIG. 4 is a flow chart illustrating exemplary steps for a server to process a message, including verifying a module's identity and decrypting data, in accordance with exemplary embodiments. The steps illustrated in FIG. 4 may comprise step 315 and step 316 illustrated in FIG. 3 above. Server 105 can receive message 208 using IP:port 207, as illustrated in FIG. 2. Message 208 can be formatted according to the UDP protocol or UDP Lite protocol, although other possibilities exist as well without departing from the scope of the present invention

At step 407, server 105 can process the packet using the appropriate transport layer protocol, such as, but not limited to, UDP. In this step 407, the body of the packet comprising message 208 can be extracted, and a checksum, if any, can be calculated to verify the integrity. Note that if the UDP Lite protocol is utilized, the checksum may optionally only apply to the packet header. At step 408, server 105 can remove channel coding, if present in message 208. Channel coding techniques utilized in step 408 could include block codes and convolution codes, and can use the same channel coding algorithms used in channel coding algorithms implemented by module 101, depicted and described in connection with FIG. 5a below. By processing channel coding in step 408, server 105 can correct potential bit errors received in message 208, although channel coding 408 may be optionally omitted. As noted above, the use of channel coding 408 can be preferred in an embodiment, since any bit errors received within module encrypted data 403 in message 208 could break (i) a cryptographic algorithms 141 used by server 105 at subsequent steps 413, and/or (ii) the verification of module digital signature 405 at step 410 below.

At step 409, the server 105 can read and record the module identity 110, if module 110 is included in message 208 as external to module encrypted data 403 as illustrated in an exemplary message 208 in FIG. 6a below. Although not illustrated in FIG. 4, server 105 can select a module public key 111 for module 101 by querying a module database 105 k with module identity 110. Module identity 110 could comprise a string or session identifier, whereby server 105 could derive or track a module identity 110 from one message 208 to the next message 208 using the string or session identifier. By including module identity 110 in a message 208, but external to module encrypted data 403 such as, but not limited to, illustrated in FIG. 6a below, a server 105 can utilize module identity 110 in order to select a server private key 105 c or symmetric key 127 for decrypting module encrypted data 403. According to an exemplary embodiment, a plurality of server private keys 105 c could be utilized, where a first private key 105 c is used with a first set of modules 101 and a second private key 105 c is used with a second set of modules 101. The first and second private keys 105 c could use or be associated with different sets of parameters 126. By reading the module identity 110 outside of module encrypted data 403, the module identity 110 can be read before decryption, in order to identify which of the first or second set server private keys 105 c that a module 101 sending message 208 is associated with, and thus server 105 can subsequently select the first or second set of server private keys 105 c to use when decrypting module encrypted data 403.

Alternatively according to an exemplary embodiment, if server 105 operates in a distributed environment (such as, but not limited to, comprising multiple sub-servers 105 w as illustrated in FIG. 10, an unencrypted module identity 110, including a possibly a session identifier for module identity 110 within a message 208, can be utilized by a message preprocessor 105 y to select the appropriate sub-server 105 w to process the message 208. Server 105 using message preprocessor 105 y could forward the message 208 to the correct sub-server 105 w. At step 410, server 105 can validate and verify the module identity 110 using the module digital signature 405 inserted by module 101 in message 208. Module digital signature 405 can comprise a secure hash signature or tag, where module 101 generated the hash signature using the module private key 112 and digital signature algorithms 141 d. As one example, server 105 can utilize the module public key 111 recorded in memory 105 e to securely validate the module digital signature 405 receive in a message 208.

The module digital signature 405 can be verified according to public key infrastructure (PKI) standards such as, but not limited to, the National Institute of Standards (NIST) “FIPS 186-4: Digital Signature Standard”, or IETF RFC 6979 titled “Deterministic Usage of the Digital Signature Algorithm (DSA) and Elliptic Curve Digital Signature Algorithm (ECDSA)”. Other PKI standards or proprietary techniques for securely verifying a module digital signature 405 may be utilized as well. If message 208 comprises an initial communication from module 101, at step 412 server 105 can verify that module public key 111 is associated with module identity 110 using a module certificate 122, where certificate 122 includes a signature 123 from a certificate authority 118, as illustrated in FIG. 1h of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/055,606, filed Oct. 16, 2013 in the name of John Nix. Server 105 could receive certificate 122 before module 101 sends message 208, or server 105 could query module 101 or another server for certificate 122 after receiving message 208. Server 105 could use digital signature algorithms 141 d to compare a secure hash calculated using (i) a first certificate 122 and/or public key from module 101 and (ii) a second certificate and/or public key from certificate authority 118 or another server, in order to confirm that module public key 111 is associated with module identity 110, where module identity 110 was read from message 208 in step 409. The secure hash could also be calculated using module public key 111 and a public key from certificate authority 118, and other possibilities using PKI exist as well for server 105 to confirm module public key 111 is associated with module identity 110 at step 412.

In an exemplary embodiment, if (A) module encrypted data 403 includes module identity 110 and/or module digital signature 405, then (B) steps 409 and/or 410 may also take place after step 413, where server 105 (i) first decrypts module encrypted data 403 and can then (ii) verify module identity 110 by performing steps 409 and 410 after step 413. If module encrypted data 403 utilizes a symmetric cipher 141 b, then a module identity 110 can preferably be external to module encrypted data 403 so that server 105 can select the appropriate symmetric key 127 used by module 101 in order to decipher module encrypted data 403 (since a plurality of modules 101 may communicate with server 105 concurrently).

After verifying module digital signature 405 in step 410, server 105 can record an authenticated module encrypted data 403 from module 101 received in message 208. At step 413, server 105 can decrypt module encrypted data 403 using cryptographic algorithms 141 and either (i) server private key 105 c as a decryption key with asymmetric ciphering 141 a or (ii) symmetric key 127 with symmetric ciphering 141 b. A symmetric key 127 may be stored in a module database 105 k, as noted in FIG. 1f above. If a symmetric key 127 is used at step 413, the symmetric key 127 could be (i) sent by server 105 in a response 209 or (ii) received by server 105 in a prior message 208, before the message 208 illustrated in FIG. 4 was received by server 105.

With an asymmetric ciphering 141 a scheme used in a module encrypted data 403 and by cryptographic algorithms 141 at step 413, server 105 can decrypt module encrypted data 403 using (i) server private key 105 c and (ii) RSA algorithms 153, elliptic curve cryptography (ECC) algorithms 154, or other algorithms for public key cryptography. The use and application of RSA algorithms 153 and cryptography are described within IETF RFC 3447, among other published standards. The use and application of ECC cryptography and algorithms are described within IETF RFC 6637, among other published standards. ECC algorithms 154 may be preferred in order to maintain high security with smaller key lengths, compared to RSA, in order to minimize the message lengths, radio frequency spectrum utilization, and processing power or energy required by module 101. Note that module encrypted data 403 may also include a security token 401 (not shown in FIG. 4, but shown in FIG. 5a ), which could comprise a random string, and thus each module encrypted data 403 received by server 105 in message 208 may be reasonably considered unique and thus robust against replay attacks.

With a symmetric ciphering 141 b scheme used in a module encrypted data 403 and by cryptographic algorithms 141 at step 413, server 105 can decrypt module encrypted data 403 using (i) symmetric key 127 and (ii) a symmetric cipher 141 b such as, but not limited to, AES 155, Triple DES, or similar secure symmetric ciphers. As one example, by using ECC cryptography and ECIES, server 105 could decrypt module encrypted data at step 413 by using the steps outlined in FIG. 3, titled “ECIES Encryption Functional Diagram” in “A Survey of the Elliptic Curve Integrated Encryption Scheme” by Martinez et al in the Journal of Computer Science and Engineering, Volume 2, August 2010, page 11, (herein incorporated by reference). Other possibilities exist as well without departing from the scope of the present invention. Server 105 can utilize step 413 illustrated in FIG. 4 to extract the plaintext, or decrypted data within module encrypted data 403.

After decrypting module encrypted data 403, server 105 can read the resulting data within message 208, which could comprise a server instruction 414. The server instruction 414 can represent the purpose of the message 208 for server 105. Server instruction 414 could comprise a plurality of different procedures for server 105, such as, but not limited to, an “update” with sensor data, a “query” for data or instructions from server 105 or M2M service provide 108, a “notification” of state or condition at module 101 such as, but not limited to, an alarm or error, a “configuration request” where module 101 seeks configuration parameters, a “software request” where module 101 request updated software or routines, a “registration” message where module 101 periodically registers with server 105, etc. Thus, server instruction 414 can comprise the purpose module 101 sends message 208. In addition, server instruction 414 could comprise a “confirmation”, where module 101 sends a “confirmation” in a second message 208 after receipt of a response 209, where response 209 could include a module instruction 502 (below), and the “confirmation” in this second message 208 could signal server 105 that the module instruction 502 had been properly executed.

As examples for server instruction 414, an “update” could be used to periodically notify server 105 of regular, periodic sensor data 305 acquired by a sensor 101 f. An “update” for server instruction 414 may also comprise a periodic report regarding monitored unit 119 or information regarding a state, condition, or level for an actuator 101 y. A “query” for server instruction 414 could comprise module 101 querying server 105 for data from a module database 105 k, where the data could be associated with monitored unit 119, wireless network 102, an element within module 101 such as, but not limited to, an actuator setting. A “notification” for server instruction 414 could comprise module 101 notifying server 105 that an alarm or error condition has occurred, such as, but not limited to, a sensor measurement exceeds a threshold value or another error condition such as, but not limited to, loss of contact with monitored unit 119. A “configuration request” for server instruction 414 could comprise module 101 requesting server 105 for configuration parameters or a configuration file. Other possibilities for server instruction 414 exist without departing from the scope of the present invention.

At step 415, server 105 can process the server instruction 414. If server instruction 414 comprises an “update”, then sensor data, or other data in server instruction 414 including potentially a new symmetric key 127 generated by module 101, could be recorded in module database 105 k, Other applications may subsequently access the sensor data for generating reports or making decisions regarding monitored unit 119. If server instruction 414 comprises a “query”, then server 105 could execute the query at step 415. If server instruction 414 comprises a “notification” of an alarm, then step 415 could initiate procedures for alarm notification to 3^(rd) parties or alarm resolution. Other possibilities for processing a server instruction 414 at step 415 exist without departing from the scope of the present invention.

FIG. 5a

FIG. 5a is a flow chart illustrating exemplary steps for a server to process a response for a module, including sending and signing a module instruction, in accordance with exemplary embodiments. The steps illustrated in FIG. 5a may comprise step 317 a and step 317 b illustrated in FIG. 3 above. Since message 208 and response 209 may traverse the public Internet 107, a module 101 and a server 105 may prefer to take additional steps to sending plaintext in packets in order to maintain security of a system 100. Server 105 can process a response 209 to a message 208 from module 101 using a module public key 111 and a server private key 105 c, according to a preferred exemplary embodiment. If a symmetric cipher 141 b is utilized within cryptographic algorithms 141, then server 105 may also utilize a symmetric key 127 to encrypt data within a response 209. Note that the security methods described herein are optional, and message 208 and response 208 can be sent without any or all of the additional security steps described herein, but the use of these security steps may be preferred.

After receiving message 208 as illustrated in FIG. 2, server 105 can prepare an acknowledgement 501. The acknowledgement 501 can be a simple text, binary, or hexadecimal string to confirm that message 208 has been received and/or processed by server 105. Since message 208 may be transmitted via a UDP or UDP Lite packet, module 101 may preferably utilize a reply message from server 105 containing acknowledgement 501, in order to confirm message 208 has been received by server 105. Alternatively, if TCP is used to transmit message 208, an acknowledgement 501 may be used at the application layer of the Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) model, wherein a simple TCP ACK message may operate at the lower transport layer than the application layer. UDP may be preferred over TCP in order to reduce processing resources for module 101 and server 105, especially considering the relatively small and comparably infrequent messages sent between a module 101 and a server 105 (when compared to web browsing and considering module 101 may have a battery 101 k that may preferably last for weeks or longer without recharging). In processing a response 209, server 105 may optionally add a security token 401, which could be a random number 128 a, or a randomly generated text, binary, or hexadecimal string. Security token 401 could be a random number 128 a or string that is included in response 209 in order to make each response 209 unique and thus avoid any replay attacks when response 209 traverses Internet 107. Note that a message 208 may also preferably include a security token 401.

In other words, the use of security token 401 can ensure to a high level of certainty that each response 209 will be different and thus the data within response 209 would not be sent more than once. Note that security token 401 may be generated by module 101 in message 208, and in this case server 105 can use the same security token received in message 208. Security token 401 can alternatively be generated by server 105 and different than any security token 401 received in message 208. Security token 401 illustrated in FIG. 5a can be derived or processed by using message 208 in accordance with preferred exemplary embodiments.

Server 105 may also optionally add a module instruction 502 when preparing a response 209. The module instruction 502 could be a string that contains instructions or configuration parameters for module 101, such as, but not limited to, an order to change state, parameters regarding the monitoring of monitored unit 119, server names or addresses, radio frequency parameters, wireless network 102 authentication parameters or keys, keys for communication with server 105 or M2M service provider 108, etc. Module instruction 502 may also comprise an instruction to change the state of actuator 101 y, a timer value, a sensor threshold value, the threshold for an alarm state, and information for display at a user interface 101 j, an instruction to sleep, etc. Module instruction 502 may further comprise an updated module private key 112, and updated server public key 114, or the address or name of a new server 105 added to M2M service provider 108. According to an exemplary preferred embodiment, a module instruction 502 could comprise a “key generation” instruction, where module 101 generates a new pair of a module private key 112 and a module public key 111, utilizing the exemplary steps and procedures illustrated in FIG. 5b below, including step 515. The “key generation” 608 module instruction 502 (illustrated in FIG. 6a below) could be used to create new keys for a new purpose (such as, but not limited to, connecting to a new wireless network 102 or communicating with a new server 105), while the existing keys used to communicate with server 105 could remain operable or be deprecated at a later time. Alternatively, an existing or previous module public key 111 could be deprecated or become invalid once server 105 sends a “key generation” module instruction 502.

In order to control module 101, server 105 would normally need to include module instruction 502 in the response 209 only after receiving message 208, since the server 105 would normally not be able to send messages to a module 101 at arbitrary times, such as before a message 208 has been received by the server 105. The reasons include (i) the module may normally be in a sleep or dormant state, in order to conserve battery life or power consumption, where an unsolicited incoming Internet packet from server 105 would not be received by module 101, and (ii) a wireless network 102 (or equivalent wired network that a wired module 101 could connect with) may frequently include a firewall 104. Firewall 104 could prevent packets from the Internet 107 from reaching module 101 unless module 101 had previously first sent a packet to server 105 within a firewall port-binding timeout period 117 of firewall 104. The port-binding timeout period of a firewall 104 may be an exemplary period such as, but not limited to, 20-60 seconds for UDP packets and several minutes for TCP packets. Note that module instruction 502 may optionally be omitted, such that (b) some response 209 messages may include module instruction 502, and (b) other response 209 messages may omit module instruction 502, but include an acknowledgement 501 to message 208. Also note that according to an exemplary embodiment described herein, the use of optional strings or steps can be depicted in FIGS. 4 and 5 a through the use of dashed lines for the various elements illustrated. In other words, the use of dashed lines shows steps that are included in one exemplary embodiment, but excluded or omitted in another exemplary embodiment.

Server 105 may then use as input the acknowledgement 501, security token 401, and module instruction 502, including optional data and cryptographic parameters 126, into cryptographic algorithms 141 at step 503. The cryptographic algorithms 141 at step 503 can utilize either (i) module public key 111 as an encryption key if asymmetric ciphering 141 a is utilized, or (ii) a shared symmetric key 127 if a symmetric cipher 141 b is utilized, such as, but not limited to, AES 155 ciphering. The output of cryptographic algorithms 141 at step 503, using acknowledgement 501, security token 401, and module instruction 502, plus optional data and parameters 126, as input, can be server encrypted data 504, as illustrated in FIG. 5a . Server encrypted data 504 could be a string or number, including a text, binary, or hexadecimal string or series of numbers or bits, and other possibilities for the formal of server encrypted data 504 exist as well, including a file, without departing from the scope of the present invention. By using module public key 111 and/or symmetric key 127 in the cryptographic algorithms 141 at step 503, server encrypted data 504 may only be reasonably decrypted by module 101 using module private key 112 and/or symmetric key 127. Thus the response 209 transmitted across an Internet 107 may be reasonably considered secure and only reasonably decrypted by module 101.

Server 105 can then process server encrypted data 504 by appending or including server identity 206. Note that server identity 206 can be appended or included after the operation of step 503, since the server identity 206 may optionally be openly readable within a response 209 transmitted or sent to module 101. As one example, server identity 206 could comprise IP address 106 as a source IP address in response 209, which would be openly readable on the Internet 107 since a valid packet must have a source and destination IP address. Additional details on an exemplary structure of response 209 are illustrated in FIG. 6a below. By including server identity 206 after encryption at step 503, the module can read the server identity 206 and verify a digital signature within response 209 without having to first decrypt data within response 209 using the module private key 112 or symmetric key 127. Note that server identity 206 could alternatively be included within server encrypted data 504, such that step 505 takes place before step 504. In other words, including server identity 206 external to a server encrypted data 504 can be used by module 101 to select the proper server public key 114 when verifying a digital signature in response 209.

Server 105 can then process a server digital signature 506 using the server private key 105 c. In an exemplary embodiment, the server digital signature 506 can be processed according to public key infrastructure (PKI) standards such as, but not limited to, the National Institute of Standards (NIST) “FIPS 186-4: Digital Signature Standard” (which is hereby incorporated herein by reference), or IETF RFC 6979 titled “Deterministic Usage of the Digital Signature Algorithm (DSA) and Elliptic Curve Digital Signature Algorithm (ECDSA)” (which is hereby incorporated herein by reference). In another exemplary embodiment the use of a server digital signature 506 can be processed according to the description of a digital signature according to the Wikipedia entry for “Digital Signature” as of Sep. 9, 2013, which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety. Also note that other uses of a digital signature as contemplated within the present invention may refer to the above three references and related standard techniques for processing and creating digital signatures. Other PKI methods for securely generating a server digital signature 506 may be utilized as well.

According to a preferred exemplary embodiment, ECC algorithms for generating server digital signature 506 may be utilized in order to minimize the key length compared to RSA algorithms. Server digital signature 506 may comprise a secure hash signature using a hash algorithm such as, but not limited to, secure hash algorithm 1 (SHA-1), or subsequent standards such as, but not limited to, SHA-2 and SHA-3, and other possibilities exist as well. Server digital signature 506 is illustrated in FIG. 5a as being processed after server encrypted data 504, but server digital signature 506 may also optionally be included in server encrypted data 504. Step 506 may also take place before step 505.

Also note that server digital signature 506 may preferably be included in a response 209 before module 101 begins either (i) utilizing a symmetric key 127 shown in step 413 to encrypt a module encrypted data 403, or (ii) accept or process a module instruction 502. After including server digital signature 506 in a first response 209 that uses asymmetric ciphering 141 a, server 105 may omit server digital signature 506 in a second subsequent response. The second subsequent response could be a case where (i) server encrypted data 504 utilizes a symmetric key 127 for ciphering (where server 105 received the symmetric key 127 in a message 208 that utilized asymmetric ciphering 141 a as illustrated in FIG. 4 above) and (ii) expiration time 133 of symmetric key 127 has not transpired.

FIG. 5b

FIG. 5b is a flow chart illustrating exemplary steps for a server to communicate with a module that has derived a public key and private key, in accordance with exemplary embodiments. In order to utilize communications secured with PKI techniques such as, but not limited to, private keys, public keys, certificates, and identities, a module 101 may preferably obtain or generate these keys and utilize a module identity 110 and/or a certificate 122 in a secure manner. Given that a plurality of modules 101 may be deployed in potentially remote places, without frequent contact with end users or technicians, the use of secure PKI techniques for a module 101 can create a significant set of challenges for the generation of module public key 111 and module private key 112, as well as properly and securely obtaining a certificate 122 with an module identity 110. Using conventional technology, significant challenges and costs can be incurred when (i) module 101 has already been deployed, such as collecting data from a monitored unit 119, and (ii) module 101 needs to utilize a new set of module private key 112 and module public key 111.

Exemplary embodiments that include derivation or processing of a new module private key 112 and module public key 111 may utilize the particular steps and procedures contemplated herein, in order to minimize any potential human intervention (with related costs) while continuing to maintain or also enhance security, compared either (i) externally generating module private key 112, and/or (ii) continuing to use the same module private key 112 for the lifetime of module 101. Over a long period of operating time for a module 101, such as, but not limited to, several years or longer, there may be many reasons module 101 may need a new pair of PKI keys, such as, but not limited to, (i) expiration of a certificate 122, or the certificate 122 of a parent signature authority, (ii) the transfer of ownership or control of module 101, where the prior ownership could have direct or indirect access to the module private key 112, (iii) supporting a new server 105 that has different security requirements or a different set of cryptographic parameters 126 (longer keys, different ECC curves, different cryptographic algorithms 141, etc.), and/or (iv) revocation of a public key in a chain of signatures associated with a certificate 122. In the case of (ii) above, new ownership of module 101 may require a module 101 to utilize a new module private key 112 since the old ownership may have access to an old module private key 122. In the case of (iii) above, a new server 105 may require a pair of public/private keys incompatible with a prior set of public/private keys utilized by module 101 and/or a certificate 122 for module 101.

Other possibilities exist as well for reasons why a module 101 and/or server 105 may prefer for a module 101 to utilize a new module public key 111 and new module private key 112. In an exemplary embodiment, module 101 may generate a new public/private key periodically in order to enhance the security of a system 100. A benefit of a system 100 supporting periodic generation of keys by module 101 is that the key length can be shortened in order to obtain a similar level of security, and the processing power and energy consumption, possibly from a battery 105 k, can be reduced through the use of shorter key lengths. In other words, over time such as, but not limited to, several months or years, the use of a plurality of different pairs of public/private keys for module 101 with shorter key lengths can be both more secure and energy efficient than using a single pair of public/private keys with a longer key length for the lifetime of module 101. Shorter key lengths may also be more compatible with processing power constraints of a module 101. Thus, in exemplary embodiments, module 101 and/or server 105 may prefer for module 101 to periodically generate new public and private keys.

The general approach adopted by most mobile phone networks over the past two decades has been founded upon the use of a pre-shared secret key recorded in subscriber identity module (SIM) or UICC cards, such as the Ki pre-shared secret key in 2G, 3G, and subsequent networks. That approach may work for mobile phones, where the SIMs can often be easily replaced, but the use of a pre-shared secret key in a SIM or UICC may not be suitable for a module 101 and M2M service provider 108 for many circumstances. As one example, significant costs may be incurred by swapping out a SIM card for already deployed modules 101, especially if they are in remote locations or continually moving such as, but not limited to, a tracking device on a container, pallet, truck, or automobile. In an exemplary embodiment, a module 101 may preferably record multiple pairs of public/private keys 111/112 for various and different functions, such as, but not limited to, connecting to different servers 105, connecting to different wireless networks 102, etc. As contemplated herein, recording more than one public/private key 111/112 can comprise module 101 recording a plurality of pairs of module public keys 111 and module private keys 112. In exemplary embodiments, one pair comprising a first module public key 111 and a first module private key 112 can be identified or selected from a different pair comprising a second module public key 111 and a second module private key 112 using a module public key identity 111 a.

The number of pairs of public/private keys useful to a module 101 concurrently could be several, such as, but not limited to, an exemplary three or more actively used public/private keys, although other possibilities exist as well. Manually trying to change or add a new SIM card each time a new security key is required may not be efficient or feasible. Or in another exemplary embodiment, the multiple pairs of private and public keys could be used in sequence, such that module 101 with server 105 utilizes a single module public key 111 and module private key 112 at any given point in time. In the case where module 101 with a module identity 110 derives or generates more than one module private key 112 and module public key 111 during the lifetime of module 101 and sends the derived module public keys 111 over time to a set of servers 105 n, this case may be considered a server 105 receiving a series of module public keys for a module identity 110. The various pairs in the series may also use either different sets of cryptographic parameters 126 or the same set of cryptographic parameters 126. The series of module public keys 111 (with corresponding module private keys 112) can be processed by a CPU 101 b with key pair generation algorithms 141 e and a random number generator 128. The random number generator 128 can use input from a sensor 101 f, a radio 101 z, and/or a temporary random seed file 139.

In exemplary embodiments, module 101 can use a module public key 111 for sending a module encrypted data 403 or receiving a server encrypted data 504 by either (i) sending the module public key 111 to a server 105 in order to allow the module encrypted data 403 to be decrypted (such as, but not limited to, using a step 413) or the server encrypted data 504 to be encrypted (such as, but not limited to, using a step 503), or (ii) inputting the module public key 111 into a key derivation function 141 f in order to derive or process a derived shared secret key 129 b, which could be used with a symmetric key 127. Other possibilities exist as well for module 101 to use its own module public key 111 with cryptographic algorithms for communicating with a server 105.

FIG. 5b illustrates exemplary steps that can be performed with module 101, including using a module program 101 i, for generating, deriving, and/or updating a module public key 111 and module private key 112. The steps illustrated in FIG. 5b include both (i) an “initial” or “startup” case where module 101 has not previously derived keys (or keys not internally derived may not have been loaded), and (ii) a subsequent or “follow on” time where module 101 can generate or derive keys after keys were initially obtained or derived. Note that efficient and secure methods and systems contemplated herein, including in FIG. 5b , may also be utilized with a regular consumer mobile phone, or smartphone, as a module 101. Mobile phones as module 101 can benefit from (i) deriving a module public key 111 and a module private key 112, (ii) sending module encrypted data 403 in a message 208 using the derived keys, and (iii) receiving a server encrypted data 504 in a response 209 also using the derived keys. In the exemplary embodiment where module 101 comprises a mobile phone, then sensor 101 f may comprise a microphone and actuator 101 y may comprise a speaker, and other possibilities exist as well to those of ordinary skill in the art for module 101 to comprise a mobile phone.

At step 511, during manufacturing of module 101, including manufacturing of sub-components such as, but not limited to, a circuit board, assembly of hardware components illustrated in FIG. 1b , etc., a module identity 110 could be written into the hardware, and could comprise a serial number, International Mobile Equipment Identity (IMEI) number, Ethernet MAC address, or a similar persistent identification for a module 101. An IEMI number may be used with a mobile phone as module 101, in a preferred embodiment. For security purposes, the module identity 110 may preferably be written into a read-only location or protected location or protected memory, such as, but not limited to, a readable location on a system bus 101 d, which could also comprise a ROM 101 c. Recording and utilizing module identity 110 is also depicted and described in connection with FIG. 1e , FIG. 2, and elsewhere herein. Alternatively, module identity 110 could be recorded in a non-volatile memory such as, but not limited to, a flash memory 101 w.

At step 512, module 101 can be distributed to end users and also installed with a monitored unit 119. If module 101 is a mobile phone, then monitored unit 119 could be a person that carries the mobile phone. Also note that a monitored unit 119 could be omitted, and a module 101 could use the techniques contemplated herein. At step 513, a shared secret key 510, parameters 126, and a server address 207 can be recorded in a nonvolatile memory 101 w. Parameters 126 may comprise settings for a cryptographic algorithms 141 as illustrated in FIG. 1g , including (i) key lengths, (ii) algorithms to utilize for key generation or ciphering, such as, but not limited to, selecting RSA algorithms 153 or ECC algorithms 154, (iii) a specific secure hash algorithm 141 c to utilize, such as, but not limited to, SHA-256 or SHA-3, (iv) an expiration date of the module public key 111, (v) a maximum time value for an expiration time 133 associated with a symmetric key 127, (vi) a ECC parameters 137 or an ECC standard curve 138 as parameters 126 in FIG. 1h of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/055,606, filed Oct. 16, 2013 in the name of John Nix, (vii) the specification of or values for a padding scheme for use with a digital signature algorithms 141 d, and/or similar or related values for using cryptographic algorithms 141 d. Although not illustrated in FIG. 5b , at step 512 a configuration file could also be loaded into non-volatile memory, where the configuration file includes a plurality of fields specifying the operation of module 101. The shared secret key 510, parameters 126, and server address 207 could be included in a configuration file.

Continuing at step 513, server identity 206 could be utilized in place of or in addition to server address 207, and in this case module 101 can later perform a DNS or DNSSEC lookup using server identity 206 in order to obtain server address 207 for use in a message 208, such as the destination address. Shared secret key 510 and server address 207 (or server identity 206) could also be recorded in a ROM 101 c at step 513. Step 513 may also be performed concurrently with step 511 or step 512. According to an exemplary embodiment, a manufacturer may perform step 513 and in this case step 513 could take place concurrently with step 511. In another embodiment, a distributor of module 101 could perform step 513 and in this case step 513 could take place concurrently with step 512. Alternatively, step 513 may be performed by a technician or end user after manufacturing and distribution and before module 101 begins collecting sensor data with a monitored unit. Other possibilities exist as well for the sequence of steps 511 through 513 illustrated in FIG. 5b without departing from the scope of the present invention.

Note that step 513 may take place multiple times during the lifetime of a module 101, and in this case (a) the first time step 513 is conducted, step 513 could be conducted concurrent with steps 511 or 512, and (b) a subsequent time step 513 is conducted, step 513 could be conducted after the receipt of a response 209, where the response 209 includes a second shared secret key 510, server address 207, and also potentially a new module identity 110. In other words, although not illustrated in FIG. 5b , a module 101 could return to step 513 from later steps upon the equivalent of a “factory reset”, or similar command where flash memory 101 w and other nonvolatile memory would be cleared. In an exemplary embodiment where step 513 takes place a second time may potentially be the transfer of ownership or control of module 101, or a another embodiment where step 513 takes place a second time could be the upload of new firmware that is incompatible with a previous configuration file. In any case, shared secret key 510 can preferably be uniquely associated with module 101 (i.e. any given shared secret key 510 may belong only to an individual module 101).

Shared secret key 510 may comprise a pre-shared secret key 129 a, as described in FIG. 1e . If module 101 has already derived a module private key 112 and module public key 111 (such as when step 513 is being conducted at a second or additional time as contemplated in the previous paragraph), then shared secret key 510 may comprise (i) a key received in a server encrypted data 504 including possibly a symmetric key 127, or (ii) a derived shared secret key 129 b. Derived shared secret key 129 b could be obtained from using a key derivation function 141 f and module public key 111 and server public key 114, using a module public key 111 that has already been derived or used by module 101 (such as if at least one module private key 112 and module public key 111 had already been used or derived before step 513).

As contemplated herein in an exemplary embodiment, an first module private key 112 and first module public key 111 could be derived outside module 101 and loaded into a nonvolatile memory such as flash memory 101 w at a prior time before step 513, and the shared secret key 510 could be received by module 101 using the first module private key 112 and module public key 111 (such as, but not limited to, receiving the shared secret key 510 in a server encrypted data 504 using the first module private key 112 which had been loaded). Step 513 could then comprise a later time after the server encrypted data 504 has been received that includes the shared secret key 510, where module 101 may (i) prefer to begin utilizing keys that module 101 internally derives using cryptographic algorithms 141 instead of (ii) continuing to use the first module public key 111 and module private key 112 that were derived outside of the module 101, such as, but not limited to, possibly loaded into a nonvolatile memory from an external source.

In the embodiment where shared secret key 510 has not been received by module 101 in a server encrypted data 504, shared secret key 510 could be obtained and loaded by a distributor, installer, or end user into a nonvolatile memory such as, but not limited to, flash memory 101 w in the form of a pre-shared secret key 129 a, where pre-shared secret key 129 a was obtained using a module identity 110 and pre-shared secret key code 134 as depicted and described in connection with FIG. 1e of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/055,606, filed Oct. 16, 2013 in the name of John Nix. Module 101 could also utilize a first pre-shared secret key 129 a, including a first pre-shared secret key 129 a entered by potentially a distributor, installer, or end-user described in FIG. 1e , to derive shared secret key 510. Other possibilities exist as well for shared secret key 510, and shared secret key 510 can be useful for the proper identification and/or authentication of module 101 upon module 101's generation of a private key 112 and public key 111, as described below including step 517. If module 101 is a mobile phone, as contemplated herein, shared secret key 510 could be loaded by a distributor or company selling or servicing the mobile phone, or shared secret key 510 could be obtained by the end user or subscriber accessing a web page associated with a mobile operator for a wireless network 102 associated with the mobile phone and/or SIM card.

Also note that as contemplated herein, an initial module private key 112 and initial module public key 111 could be recorded into nonvolatile memory at step 513. For example, a manufacturer, distributor, installer, technician, or end-user could load the initial module private key and initial module public key 111, where the initial module public key 111 would be utilized to authenticate at step 517 a subsequent set of public/private keys derived by module 101 at step 515. In this case, the initial module public key 111 and/or initial module private key 112 described in the previous two sentences could comprise the shared secret key 510. In another embodiment, the initial module public key 111 and initial module private key 112 could be recorded in a SIM or UICC, and the SIM or UICC could be either virtual or physical such as, but not limited to, a SIM card, including a Universal Integrated Circuit Card (UICC) or an embedded UICC (eUICC). A set of servers 105 n could also record the initial module public key 111 recorded in the SIM (including an eUICC), and the set of servers 105 n could authenticate a message or a subsequent module public key 111 derived by module 101 (such as in a step 515 below) using the initial module public key 111.

The use of an initial module public key 111 and/or initial module private key 112 are also depicted and described in connection with FIG. 5b of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/055,606, filed Oct. 16, 2013 in the name of John Nix, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. Thus, FIG. 5b also contemplates an embodiment where shared secret key 510 at step 513 comprises an initial public/private key pair for module 101 that is not internally derived by module 101, including keys derived at step 515. Note that the contemplation of the use of shared secret key 510 as a pre-shared secret key 129 a within the present invention may be different than the use of a pre-shared secret key within a subscriber identity module (SIM) card as commonly supported by wireless networks 102 with mobile phones in 2013.

If either a “virtual” SIM or a physical SIM card or eUICC is present within module 101 (including a UICC or eUICC), and the SIM contains a pre-shared secret key, such as, but not limited to, Ki, then as contemplated herein, shared secret key 510 may be derived using the SIM and Ki. As one example, module 101 could (i) utilize a RAND message, potentially received from a 3G or 4G mobile network such as wireless network 102, and (ii) input the RAND into the SIM card and receive a response RES (or SRES), and utilize the string in RES to process or derive a shared secret key 510. Response RES could also comprise a shared secret key 510. Server 105 could also submit the same RAND associated with the SIM and Ki to wireless network 102, and receive the same RES as obtained by module 101. By both module 101 and server 105 having the same RES value, they can follow a pre-agreed series of steps to use the same RES in order to derive a commonly shared secret key 510 (or the shared RES could comprise a shared secret key 510). In one embodiment where module 101 includes a SIM for a wireless network 102, such as, but not limited to, a 4G LTE network, module 101 and server 105 could both utilize a key derivation function 141 f, using the same RES as input, in order to derive the same shared secret key 510.

At step 514, module 101 can read module identity 110 using a read-only address. Module 101 can read module identity 110 directly from read-only hardware address by using system bus 101 d, including from a ROM 101 c, or module 101 can read module identity 110 from a nonvolatile memory such as a flash memory 101 w. Step 514 could also take place after step 515 below. At Step 515, module 101 can derive module private key 112 and a corresponding module public key 111 using (i) random number generator 128, (ii) cryptographic parameters 126, (iii) cryptographic algorithms 141, and/or (iv) a key pair generation algorithm 141 e. Module 101 at step 515 and elsewhere in the present invention can be a mobile phone such as, but not limited to, a smartphone. Private key 112 and corresponding module public key 111 can be derived according to a wide range of parameters 126, and can utilize different algorithms for different pairs of keys, such as, but not limited to, RSA 153 or ECC 154. Key derivation at step 515 could generate keys of various lengths, such as, but not limited to, 2048 bits with RSA 153 or 283 bits with ECC 154, and other possibilities exist as well. If using ECC 154 to derive a pair of keys for module 101, step 515 could also accommodate the use of different elliptic curves for compatibility with server 105, such as, but not limited to, the use of odd-characteristic curves, Koblitz curves, and making sure the derived keys by module 101 use a compatible or identical elliptic curve or defined elliptic curve equation as server 105, etc. Module 101 can use ECC parameters 137 or an ECC standard curve 138 in a parameters 126 to derive module private key 112 and/or module public key 111.

Deriving keys in step 515 could also comprise using values such as constants or variables in a set of cryptographic parameters 126 to define an elliptic curve equation for use with an ECC algorithm 154. The values or constants to define an equation for an elliptic curve could be input into a key pair generation algorithms 141 e in the form of ECC parameters 137 or an ECC standard curve 138. In an exemplary embodiment, where a parameters 126 does not include constants and variables for defining an elliptic curve equation, a key pair generation algorithms 141 e could use pre-defined elliptic curves with ECC algorithms 154 such as, but not limited to, standardized, named curves in ECC standard curve 138 including exemplary values such as, but not limited to, sect283k1, sect283r1, sect409k1, sect409r1, etc. Exemplary, standardized named curves, as opposed to module 101 and server 105 using an internally generated elliptic curve equation using cryptographic parameters 126, are also identified as example curves in IETF RFC 5480, titled “Elliptic Curve Cryptography Subject Public Key Information”. Thus, module 101 could use either standardized elliptic curves, or a separate defined elliptic curve equation as specified in a parameters 126.

The curve for module 101 to utilize in deriving module public key 111 and module private key 112 at step 515 could be specified in a set of cryptographic parameters 126. Consequently, the parameters of keys generated by module 101 at step 515 (including key length or algorithms utilized) may be selected based upon the requirements of the application and can be included in a parameters 126. When deriving keys at step 515, module 101 may also preferably utilize data from sensor 101 f, radio 101 z, a bus 101 d, a physical interface 101 a, memory 101 e, and/or a clock in order to generate a seed 129 for random number generator 128, or random number generator 128 could utilize these inputs directly. A random number 128 a can be input into key pair generation algorithm 141 e in order to derive the module public key 111 and module private key 112. Note that with ECC algorithms 154, a module private key 112 can be a random number 128 a in one embodiment, and the module public key 111 can be derived with a key pair generation algorithms 141 e using the module private key 112 comprising the random number 128 a.

Upon key derivation at step 515, module private key 112 and module public key 111 can be recorded in a nonvolatile memory 101 w. Module private key 112 can preferably not be transmitted or sent outside module 101. Also note that over a potential lifetime of a decade or more of operation of module 101, each time a new module private key 112 may be required (for various potential reasons outlined above), the external recording and/or transferring of module private key 112 incurs a potential security risk. Security risks can be compounded if the external location records private keys 112 for a plurality of modules 101. Also, by internally generating private key 112 at step 515, module 101 can overcome significant limitations and costs requiring the distribution of a pre-shared secret key Ki in the form of a SIM card or similar physical distribution of a pre-shared secret key, after module 101 begins operations. In comparison, the use of a shared secret key 510 in the present invention does not require physical distribution of a new shared secret key 510 after module 101 begins operations. Module 101's key derivation could be triggered by either (i) a bootloader program 125, where the bootloader program 125 determines that memory within module 101 does not contain a module private key 112, or (ii) via a module instruction 502 such as, but not limited to, a “key generation” or “derive new keys” command in a response 209 from a server, and other possibilities exist as well.

Note that module 101's generation of keys after deployment and installation may create challenges for authentication of a new module public key 111 with module identity 110, since module 101 may be connecting to server 105 or M2M service provider 108 via the Internet 107. After module 101 creates new module public key 111 and module private key 112 at step 515, at step 516 server 105 can receive a message 208 with the module identity 110, the new module public key 111, and cryptographic parameters 126. Parameters 126 in message 208 at step 516 can represent the parameters 126 used to generate the module public key 111. The sub-steps for a server 105 to receive a message 208 are also depicted and described in connection with FIG. 2 and also FIG. 1c above. Parameters 126 within a message 208 can comprise descriptive values for new module public key 111. Note that at step 516, server 105 does not need to receive new module public key 111 in the form of a certificate 122 (although it could be in the form of a certificate 122). New module public key 111 could be received by server 105 within a string or field within a body 602 of a TCP/UDP packet 601 a, illustrated in FIG. 6b below. As depicted in step 516 shown in FIG. 6b below, message 208 at step 516 can also optionally include a module public key identity 111 a, which can be recorded in module database 105 k along with module identity 110 and module public key 111 a.

According to an exemplary embodiment, a first source (IP:port) number received in a first message 208 at step 516 can be different than a second source IP:port number in a second message 208 at step 518 below, wherein a response 209 send in step 519 below can preferably be sent to the second source IP:port number received in the second message 208 at step 518 in order to traverse a firewall 104 (as depicted and described in connection with packet 209 a in FIG. 2). In other words, the proper destination IP:port for a response 209 to a module 101 can change over time, such as the proper destination IP:port changing due to the use of sleep states by module 101 and/or function of a firewall 104. Consequently, according to an exemplary embodiment, a response 209 can utilize a destination IP:port number equal to the source IP:port number received in the last (i.e. most recent) message 208 from module 101 received by server 105.

At step 517, server 105 can authenticate the message 208 received in step 516 using the shared secret key 510 described in step 513. Server 105 could record the shared secret key 510 before step 517 in a module database 105 k. If step 517 occurs for the first time in a lifetime of module 101, then shared secret key 510 could comprise a pre-shared secret key 129 a recorded by server 105 in a module database 105 k illustrated in FIG. 1f . If step 517 occurs at subsequent time, then server 105 could have sent shared secret key 510 in a server encrypted data 504 and recorded shared secret key 510 in a module database 105 k for later use (such as at step 517). Server 105 can authenticate the message 208 according to message digest, or using the shared secret key 510 to process a symmetric key 127 within a symmetric ciphering algorithm 141 b, where the successful encryption and decryption of data within message 208 using the shared secret key 510 on both ends could be confirmation that message 208 is authenticated, since both parties would only be able to mutually successfully encrypt and decrypt by sharing the same shared secret key 510. As contemplated herein, the term “authenticating a public key” may refer to “authenticating a message that includes the public key”, and both may refer to validating or verifying that a recorded module identity 110 stored in server 105 is associated with a receive module public key 111.

Other possibilities exist as well for server 105 to use a shared secret key 510 in order to authenticate a message 208 that contains a new module public key 111 (where module 101 contains a new module private key 112). In one embodiment, message 208 in step 516 could include a secure hash signature using secure hash algorithms 141 c, where both the module 101 and the server 105 input a string combing at least a portion of the shared secret key 510 and a portion of the new module public key 111 into the secure hash algorithms 141 c in order to obtain the secure hash signature. Module 101 could send the secure hash signature to server 105 in a message 208. The authentication of a new module public key 111 in step 517 is also depicted and described in step 1202 of FIG. 12 below, including the authentication and/or verification of either (i) new module public key 111 or (ii) a message 208 that includes new module public key 111 according to steps that use alternatives to a shared secret key 510. Thus, according to some exemplary embodiments (also discussed with step 1202 in FIG. 12 below), new module public key 111 can be authenticated and/or verified as being properly associated with a recorded module identity 110 in server 105 (i) without the use of a shared secret key 510, and/or (ii) with alternatives to using shared secret key 510. After receiving authenticated new module public key 111 in steps 516 and 517, according to a preferred exemplary embodiment, server 105 can preferably only accept and process (A) either incoming (i) a symmetric keys 127 ciphered with a asymmetric ciphering algorithm 141 a, and/or (ii) incoming server instructions 414, when (B) the next or a subsequent incoming message 208 from module 101 using module identity 110 also includes a valid module digital signature 405 verified by using the new module public key 111, received at step 516.

According to an exemplary embodiment, shared secret key 510 can be associated with a module public key identity 111 a, and shared secret key 510 can be used to authenticate a particular value for a module public key identity 111 a. In this embodiment, (i) a message 208 with module public key 111 and a first module public key identity 111 a may be authenticated using a shared secret key 510, but (ii) a second message with module public key 111 and a second module public key identity 111 a may not be authenticated using the same shared secret key 510. Thus, in accordance with an exemplary embodiment, shared secret key 510 can be used for both (i) a single time for authenticating a module public key 111, and (ii) authenticating a module public key 111 with a particular value for the module public key identity 111 a. Note that module public key identity 111 a can be particularly useful with key revocation, such that a key revocation could specify a particular module public key identity 111 a (associated with a particular module public key 111) to be revoked, but other module public keys 111 for a module 101 and module identity 110 with different module public key identities 111 a could remain valid and not revoked.

Although not illustrated in FIG. 5b , server 105 could operate with a certificate authority 118 in order to utilize a new module public key 111, as described in this paragraph. In this case, server 105 could bypass the authentication at step 517, but certificate authority 118 may perform step 517 in order to sign the certificate 122, including possibly using shared secret key 510 to authenticate module public key 111. At step 516, new module public key 111 could be received by server 105 in the form of a uniform resource locator (URL) or domain name for download of a certificate 122 corresponding to the new module public key 111. Using a certificate authority 118 in conjunction with step 516 is also depicted and described in connection with FIG. 5b of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/055,606, filed Oct. 16, 2013 in the name of John Nix, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.

After steps 516 and 517, server 105 can update a module database 105 k using the module identity 110 to insert or update the new module public key 111, and parameters 126 associated with new module public key 111. Server 105 may communicate with a plurality of modules 101, and thus could utilize a module database 105 k in order to record the new module public key 111 and parameters 126 with the module identity 110. In one embodiment, the module identity 110 could preferably operate as an index within a table of module database 105 k in order to speed reads and writes from the table used with module public key 111, parameters 126, and also selecting a symmetric key 127 for a symmetric ciphering algorithm 141 b in later messages. As described in FIG. 1g , parameters 126 can include data useful for the operation of cryptographic algorithms 141 and module public key 111. According to a preferred exemplary embodiment, some modules 101 in a system 100 could utilize a first elliptic curve, such as, but not limited to, using a first set of ECC parameters 137 or first ECC standard curve 138 within a parameters 126, and other modules 101 could utilize a second and different elliptic curve within a parameters 126, such as, but not limited to, a second set of ECC parameters 137 or second ECC standard curve 138.

After verifying the new module public key 111 in a step 517, at step 518 of FIG. 5b , server 105 could receive a second message 208, and the second message 208 can include a module identity 110 and module encrypted data 403. Although not illustrated in FIG. 5b , the second message 208 could also include a module digital signature 405, wherein the module digital signature is created with the new module public key 111 received in step 516. Server 105 could then utilize the steps illustrated in FIG. 4 in order to process the incoming message 208 with the new module public key 111, including using the module identity 110 received in the second message 208 at step 518 to select the new module public key 111 and subsequently verify a module digital signature 405 using the new module public key 111 and digital signature algorithm 141 d. Also as discussed in FIG. 4 in connection with processing a received message 208, server 105 could decrypt the module encrypted data 403 in the second message 208 by using server private key 105 c. In one embodiment, the second message 208 as illustrated in FIG. 5b , which could be the next message after authenticating module public key 111 in step 517, could include a symmetric key 127.

The module encrypted data 403 in step 518 could include a symmetric key 127 for utilization with a symmetric cipher 141 b, where symmetric key 127 could be ciphered with an asymmetric ciphering algorithm 141 a. In another embodiment, module 101 could also send sensor data in a module encrypted data 403 at step 518. Or, at step 518 the second message 208 could be a signal and/or data (such as a random number 128 a) for server 105 to use a key derivation function 141 f with the server public key 114 and the new module public key 111 (received at step 516) to create a new derived shared key 129 b for use with symmetric ciphering algorithms 141 b in subsequent messages 208. In other words, in some embodiments derived shared key 129 b can function as a symmetric key 127. If the second message 208 in step 518 comprises a signal and/or data for server 105 to derive a new derived shared key 129 b, then this second message 208 could then optionally leave off module encrypted data 403 and/or a module digital signature 405. The successful use of a new derived shared key 129 b (using the new module public key 111, possible received in step 516, and existing server public key 114) with symmetric ciphering algorithms 141 b at subsequent steps by both module 101 and server 105 can indicate to each the communications are mutually authenticated. Second message 208 could also include a server instruction 414, a security token 401, and/or a timestamp value 604 a, and other possibilities exist as well without departing from the scope of the present invention.

At step 519, server 105 can send a response 209 to module 101, where the response 209 includes server encrypted data 504 and a module instruction 502. Server 105 could take the steps to create and send response 209 as depicted and described in connection with FIG. 5a . Response 209 could be formatted according to the exemplary response 209 illustrated in FIG. 6a below. The module instruction 502 could be an acknowledgement 501 that the second message 208 sent in step 518 was received by server 105. At step 520, server 105 can receive a third message 208 with a confirmation 414 to server 105. Confirmation 414 can be used to signal proper execution of module instruction 502 from a step 519, if module instruction 502 comprised an instruction other than an “ACK” or acknowledgement 501. In an embodiment where module instruction 502 in step 519 comprises an acknowledgement 501 from server 105, then the confirmation 414 may omitted and in this case step 520 could be skipped.

At step 521 server 105 can determine or evaluate if a new module public key 111 and/or certificate 122 are required for continued operation. One reason for the need of new keys could be the expiration of a certificate 122 for module 101, or the desire to utilize a different set of cryptographic parameters 126 such as, but not limited to, a longer key length for increase security or the use of a different ECC parameters 137 or a different ECC standard curve 138 with cryptographic algorithms 141. As described elsewhere herein, many other possibilities exist for reasons why module 101 and/or server 105 can prefer for module 101 to utilize a new module public key 111 and new module private key 112. Either server 105 or module 101 may determine that the use of a new module public key 111 and new module private key 112 may be preferred at step 521. If module 101 determines that the use of a new module public key 111 and new module private key 112 is preferred or desirable, module 101 could send server 105 a signal that new keys will be generated either before step 521 or at step 521.

Upon determining new keys are desirable at step 521, then server 105 could instruct module 101 to derive new private and public keys by returning to step 515. Although not illustrated in FIG. 5b , upon determining “yes” at step 521, server 105 could send a module instruction 502 of “new key generation” and also a new or current set of cryptographic parameters 126 to utilize with the new module private key 112 and module public key 111. In accordance with exemplary embodiments, module instruction 502, including the “new key generation” instruction and set of parameters 126, can be sent in a response 209 both (i) after module 101 wakes from a sleep or dormant state and sends a message 208 after waking from the sleep or dormant state, and (ii) before the expiration of a firewall port binding timeout value 117 after receiving the message 208. If server 105 determines that new keys are not required or desirable at step 521, server 105 can then proceed to step 312 and wait for additional incoming messages 208 from module 101 with module identity 110 or other modules. Step 312 is also depicted and described in connection with FIG. 3. Other possibilities exist as well for a server to receive and respond to messages without departing from the scope of the present invention.

FIG. 6a

FIG. 6a is a simplified message flow diagram illustrating an exemplary message received by a server, and an exemplary response sent from the server, in accordance with exemplary embodiments. FIG. 6a illustrates exemplary details within message 208 received by server 105 and also response 209 sent by server 105. Message 208 may comprise a TCP/UDP packet 601 a sent from module 101 source IP:port 204 to server 105 destination IP:port 207. According to an exemplary embodiment, UDP or UDP Lite formatting for TCP/UDP packet 601 a may be preferred. Source IP:port 204 and destination IP:port 207 in message 208 may be included within a header in TCP/UDP packet 601 a. Although a single message 208, response 209, module 101, and server 105 are shown in FIG. 6a , system 100 as illustrated in FIG. 2 and other systems depicted herein may comprise a plurality of each of the nodes and datagrams illustrated in FIG. 6s . As contemplated herein, the term “datagram” may also refer to a “packet”, such that referring to as datagram 601 a can be equivalent to referring to packet 601 a. Note that when using TCP protocol, a packet within a series of TCP messages can also be a datagram 601 a.

TCP/UDP packet 601 a may include a body 602, which can represent the data payload of TCP/UDP packet 601 a. The data payload of message 208 can optionally include channel coding 406 as described in FIG. 4 above, if the transport protocol for TCP/UDP packet 601 a supports the transmission of bit errors in the body 602 (as opposed to entirely dropping the packet), such as, but not limited to, with the UDP Lite protocol. Support for the transmission of bit errors in body 602 by wireless network 102 would be preferred over entirely discarding a packet, since the programs such as module controller 105 x could include support for and utilization of channel coding 406. Without UDP Lite formatting, message 208 can alternatively sent by module 101 as a UDP datagram, such as if wireless network 102 (or a wired connection) does not support the UDP Lite protocol.

Note that if (A) message 208 comprises (i) regular UDP or TCP formatting (i.e. not UDP Lite or similar variations) within an IPv6 network, or (ii) a UDP or TCP format within an IPv4 network with a checksum 603 enabled (i.e. checksum 603 not equal to zero), then (B) channel coding 406 may optionally be omitted. Checksum 603 can comprise a value to for an integrity check of a packet 601 a, and the calculation and use of checksum 603 is defined in IETF standards for TCP and UDP packets. In accordance with an exemplary embodiment, including the use of IPv6 for Internet 107 and a UDP datagram for message 208 and response 209, a checksum 603 sent by module 101 in a message 208 does not equal a checksum 603 in the message 208 received by server 105.

The body 602 can include a module identity 110, module encrypted data 403, and channel coding 406. Although not illustrated in FIG. 6a , body 602 could also include a module digital signature 405, as illustrated in FIG. 6 of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/039,401. Module identity 110 is illustrated in FIG. 6a as external to module encrypted data 403, although module identity 110 may optionally only be included in module encrypted data 403, and in this case module identity 110 would not be external to module encrypted data 403 in a body 602. By including module identity 110 as external to module encrypted data 403, server 105 can use the unencrypted module identity 110 in order to select either (i) the appropriate module public key 111 to verify module digital signature 405 if an asymmetric cipher 141 a is used within cryptographic algorithms 141, or (ii) the appropriate symmetric key 127 within cryptographic algorithms 141 to decrypt the module encrypted data 403. Module public key 111 and symmetric key 127 may preferably be recorded in a module database 105 k, such that server 105 can access a plurality of public keys associated with different module identities 110 with different bodies 602 for a plurality of modules 101.

Thus, by including module identity 110 external to module encrypted data 403, server 105 can utilize the module identity 110 to query a module database 105 k and select the appropriate module public key 111 or symmetric key 127. As noted previously, module identity 110 could comprise a string or number that is uniquely associated with module identity 110, such as, but not limited to, a session identity, as opposed to being a module identity 110 that is read from hardware in module 101 such as, but not limited to, an IMEI number, Ethernet MAC address, etc. Module identity 110 is illustrated in FIG. 6a as a session identity that is a different representation of module identity 110 of a serial number such as in FIG. 2, but in both cases the values can comprise a module identity 110 since the values can be uniquely associated with module 101 at different points in time.

According to an exemplary embodiment where asymmetric ciphering 141 a of module encrypted data 403 is utilized, such as (i) the first message 208 sent by module 101 and (ii) where a symmetric key 127 had not been previously exchanged, module identity 110 can be (a) within module encrypted data and (b) not external to module encrypted data 403. In this case, server 105 can utilize server private key 105 c to, in sequence, decrypt module encrypted data 403, extract module identity 110 from the decrypted module encrypted data 403, and then used the module identity 110 to select module public key 111 from module database 105 k in order to verify a module digital signature 405. In a related embodiment, if a module identity 110 is in body 602 and external to module encrypted data 403, then module identity 110 could be obfuscated or otherwise ciphered according to a pre-agreed algorithm with server 105, such that server 105 can utilize the obfuscated or ciphered module identity 110 to select a module public key 111 from module database 105 k. The value of “[Module Identity String]” shown in FIG. 6a could comprise an obfuscated module identity 110. According to an exemplary embodiment where (i) symmetric ciphering 141 b of module encrypted data 403 is utilized, such as after a first message 208 had already been sent by module 101 and a symmetric key 127 had previously been exchanged, then (ii) module identity 110 can be external to module encrypted data 403 and in body 602 in order for server 105 to utilize module identity 110 and select symmetric key 127 from a module database 105 k, thereby enabling server 105 to decrypt the module encrypted data 403 using the selected symmetric key 127 and a symmetric ciphering algorithm 141 b.

In exemplary embodiments, a module digital signature 405 may optionally be omitted from body 602 after module 101 has previously sent symmetric key 127 in a previous message 208 to the message 208 illustrated in FIG. 6a . In other words, in a series of messages 208, module 101 can preferably change from (i) using asymmetric ciphering 141 a with in a previous message 208 that includes symmetric key 127 in a module encrypted data 403 (where the initial message 208 also includes module digital signature 405 and module identity 110) to (ii) using symmetric ciphering 141 b with subsequent messages 208 without module digital signature 405 in the series (where the subsequent messages 208 can optionally include an obfuscated module identity 110 external to module encrypted data 403 for server 105 to select the appropriate symmetric key 127). Message 208 illustrated in FIG. 6a can comprise a subsequent message 208 as described in the previous sentence. A series of messages 208 could begin when the initial message 208 is sent by module 101 and end when expiration time 133 of symmetric key 127 has transpired, and subsequently a new series of messages 208 could begin where the first message 208 in the new series of messages changes back to asymmetric ciphering 141 a with initial message 208 that includes symmetric key 127 in a module encrypted data 403 (where the initial message 208 also includes a new module digital signature 405). An example of the initial message 208 described in this paragraph can comprise message 208 illustrated in FIG. 6 of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/039,401, filed Sep. 27, 2013 in the name of John Nix, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. Other possibilities exist as well without departing from the scope of the present invention.

Using a message 208 with a module digital signature 405 can be both more efficient and overall more secure than digest authentication (such as the digest authentication described in IETF RFC 2069), although using digest-based authentication may be alternatively used. The use of a module digital signature 405 requires only a single packet for message 208 and a single packet for response 209 for secure communication between module 101 and server 105. Module encrypted data 403 illustrated in FIG. 6a can be processed using the steps and algorithms described in FIG. 4. Note that module encrypted data 403 as illustrated in FIG. 6a is shown in a plaintext form for ease of illustration, but actual module encrypted data 403 within body 602 of a packet 601 a could be transmitted as binary, hexadecimal, Base64 binary-to-text encoding, or other encoding rules and strings of the actual data within module encrypted data 403 would not normally be human readable.

In an exemplary embodiment, encryption by module 101 may optionally be omitted, and the server instruction 414 with corresponding data could be included within a message 208 without encryption, such as if security could be maintained at the network level. As one example for this embodiment without encryption, server instruction 414 could be included in body 602 as plaintext. The encryption and/or security could be applied through other means, such as, but not limited to, a secure tunnel between module 101 and server 105, although setting up and maintaining a secure tunnel and similar or other means of security may require more processing and bandwidth resources than the efficient techniques described herein.

Module encrypted data 403 can include a server instruction 414, a server identity 206, a module identity 110, a security token 401, a timestamp 604 a, and a sensor measurement 604 b. The server instruction 414 can represent the purpose of the message 208 for server 105, and FIG. 6a illustrates an “update” for server instruction 414. An update for server instruction 414 could be used to periodically notify server 105 of regular, periodic sensor measurements 604 b acquired by a sensor 101 f or also data from a plurality of sensors. An update for server instruction 414 may also comprise a periodic report regarding monitored unit 119, and a server instruction 414 is described in FIG. 4. Other server instructions 414 besides an “update” may be included in a module encrypted data 403 within a body 602. The “update” illustrated in message 208 in FIG. 6a can also include a new symmetric key 127, and the module encrypted data 403 illustrated in FIG. 6a may comprise the use of either an asymmetric ciphering 141 a with public/private keys, or (ii) symmetric ciphering 141 b with a symmetric key 127.

An initial transmission or negotiation of a symmetric key 127 may preferably utilize asymmetric ciphering 141 a and the use of a public key as an encryption key and a private key as a decryption key. Subsequent transmission of a new symmetric key 127 may utilize either (i) a symmetric cipher 141 b with a previously negotiated but still valid symmetric key 127 (i.e. expiration time 133 has not transpired), or (ii) asymmetric ciphering 141 a. If the data within instruction 414 is longer than the maximum data length supported by a selected asymmetric ciphering algorithm 141 a and the public/private key pair, then module encrypted data 403 within message 208 can be broken up into several sections, such that the data within each section is less than the maximum data length supported by the asymmetric ciphering algorithm 141 a and key length. In an exemplary embodiment, a first symmetric key 127 can be used with module encrypted data 403 and a second symmetric key 127 can be used with server encrypted data 504. The first symmetric key 127 and second symmetric key 127 can be different, including using a first symmetric ciphering algorithm 141 b with the first symmetric key and a second symmetric ciphering algorithm 141 b with the second symmetric key 127. In another exemplary embodiment, in order to reduce the number of messages required to be transmitted and thus save power usage by a module 101, symmetric key 127 used with module encrypted data 403 and server encrypted data 504 can be the same and rotated periodically such, but not limited to, when expiration time 133 for a symmetric key 127 transpires.

Module identity 110 within module encrypted data 403 can represent the identity of module 110, and could represent a serial number read by module 101 from a read-only hardware address. Module identity 110 is described in FIG. 1c and can represent a unique identifier of module 101. Module identity 110 outside module encrypted data 403 can represent a string or number that is different than a serial number that can be used by module 101 within a module encrypted data 403. Security token 401 within module encrypted data 403 can represent a random string in order to make message 208 reasonably unique and thus system 100 in FIG. 2 and other systems illustrated herein robust against replay attacks. Security token 401 is described in FIG. 5a . Timestamp 604 a can represent a time value that module 101 sends message 208 or a time value that module 101 acquired sensor data 604 b. Sensor data 604 b is described with the description of a sensor 101 f in FIG. 1e , and sensor data 604 b can represents data module 101 acquires using sensor 101 f. Sensor data 604 b within message 208 may be stored by server 105 in a module database 105 k, or potentially forwarded to another server such as, but not limited to, an application server 171 for additional processing. Sensor data 604 b can comprise a wide range of values for a sensor 101 f besides the exemplary value of a temperature reading shown in FIG. 6a , including raw sensor data, compressed sensor data, and processed or averaged data. The specific sensor data 604 b shown in FIG. 6a is illustrated to be exemplary and not limiting for sending and receiving sensor data. Sensor data 604 b may also be referred to as a sensor measurement 604 b.

FIG. 6a also illustrates exemplary details within response 209 sent by server 105. Response 209 may comprise a TCP/UDP packet 601 b sent from server 105 IP:port 207 the IP address 210 and port number 605, where IP address 210 represents the external IP address of wireless network firewall 104 and port number 605 is the source port in message 208 as received by server 105 (i.e. the source port in message 208 after traversing the firewall 104 illustrated in FIG. 6a ). Thus, IP:port with IP address 210 and port number 605 in response 209 may be different than IP:port 204 in message 208, since the presence of a wireless network firewall 104 may perform NAT routing, which could change the source IP address and source port number from IP:port 204 to IP address 210 and port number 605 in message 208, as received by server 105. The use of wireless network firewall 104 in wireless network 102 may require that response 209 be sent from IP:port 207 to IP address 210 and port number 605 in order to be properly processed by firewall 104 and forwarded to module 101 at IP:port 204. Source IP:port 207 and destination IP address 210 and port number 605 in response 209 may be included within a header in TCP/UDP packet 601 b, as illustrated in FIG. 6a . TCP/UDP packet 601 b could comprise a regular UDP packet, a UDP Lite packet, or a TCP datagram, or similar protocols supported by an Internet 107. TCP/UDP packets 601 a and 601 b may utilize the same protocol.

As noted previously, the use of checksums may be mandatory in IPv6 networks, and thus a response 209 comprising a packet 601 b can include a checksum value 603 (illustrated in message 208 but not response 209) for the header. The use of firewalls such as firewall 104 can change the header values in a packet 601 b. In accordance with a preferred exemplary embodiment, a first checksum value 603 within a response 209 sent by server 105 can be different and/or not equal to a second checksum value 603 within the response 209 received by module 101. Likewise, in an exemplary embodiment, a first checksum value 603 within a message 208 sent by a module 101 can be different and/or not equal to a second checksum value 603 within the message 208 received by server 105.

A UDP, TCP, or UDP Lite datagram as a TCP/UDP packet 601 b within response 209 may include a body 606. Body 606 may comprise the payload or data within a UDP, TCP, or UDP Lite packet. Body 606 can include a server identity 206, a server digital signature 506 (not shown in FIG. 6a ), server encrypted data 504, and channel coding 406. Server identity 206 is illustrated in FIG. 6a as external to server encrypted data 504 within body 606, but server identity 206 may optionally be included in server encrypted data 504 instead. Module 101 may communicate with a plurality of servers 105, and server identity 206 as external to server encrypted data 504 can allow module 101 to select the appropriate symmetric key 127 to utilize for decrypting server encrypted data 504 (since each of the multiple servers 105 that module 101 communicates with may utilize a different symmetric key 127).

Also note that the server identity 206 can be similar to module identity 110, such that multiple different values for server identity 206 could be utilized in different systems illustrated herein, but each of the different values could preferably be uniquely associated with a server 105. As one example, server identity 206, outside server encrypted data 504 as illustrated in FIG. 6a , may comprise a session identity or session identifier, as opposed to a different server identity 206 that could comprise a hardware serial number or domain name for server 105. Thus, server identity 206 outside a server encrypted data 504 may be a different string or representation than server identity 206 within server encrypted data 504, but both strings/numbers used for server identity 206 in response 209 could be associated with server 105. In an exemplary embodiment, a set of servers 105 n can collectively use a server identity 206.

Although not illustrated in FIG. 6a , a server digital signature 506 in body 606 can comprise a secure hash signature of a subset of body 606, where the subset of body 606 can comprise server encrypted data 504, and/or server identity 206 as illustrated in FIG. 6a . The use of a server digital signature 506 in a body 606 is illustrated in FIG. 6 of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/039,401, filed Sep. 27, 2013 in the name of John Nix, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. In this manner, module 101 can utilize server digital signature 506 to authenticate that response 209 was sent by server 105. Channel coding 406 in body 606 is also depicted and described in connection with FIG. 5a above. The server digital signature 506 may optionally be omitted as well.

Body 606 may include server encrypted data 504. Server encrypted data 504 is depicted and described in connection with FIG. 5a above. Server encrypted data 504 may include an acknowledgement 501, wherein acknowledgement 501 can notify module 101 that message 208 has been received by server 105. As illustrated in FIG. 6a , server encrypted data 504 may optionally also include a module instruction 502 for module 101. The module instruction 502 could be a string that contains instructions or configuration parameters for module 101, such as an order to change state, parameters regarding the monitoring of monitored unit 119, server names or addresses, radio frequency parameters, timer values, settings for actuator 101 y, etc. A module instruction 502 is depicted and described in connection with FIG. 5a above. The exemplary module instruction 502 illustrated in FIG. 6a comprises a “key generation” 608 instruction for module 101 derive a new set of keys, also depicted and described in connection with FIG. 5b above. Other possibilities for a module instruction 502 within a response 209 are possible as well without departing from the scope of the present invention. Although not depicted in FIG. 6a or FIG. 2, if response 209 includes a module instruction 502, according to an exemplary embodiment, module 101 can preferably send a second message 208 to server 105, where the second message 208 includes a confirmation that module instruction 502 was successfully executed or implemented by module 101. This confirmation could be included in a server instruction 414 for server 105 within a second message 208, and the confirmation could include a timestamp value 601 a for when the module instruction 502 was executed. A timestamp value 601 a may be useful for tracking time of actions and data collected, when a module 101 may only periodically have access to a network 102 and also may periodically be dormant or sleep.

Also, although a server encrypted data 504 may be included within a body 606 in exemplary embodiments, body 606 may optionally omit server encrypted data 504 and include data from server 105 or a set of servers 105 n that is not encrypted, such as, but not limited to, plaintext. As one example in this case, acknowledgement 501 could be included in body 606 as plaintext. Also, although not illustrated in FIG. 6a , server encrypted data 504 could include a symmetric key 127 for module 101 to utilize with symmetric ciphering 141 b in cryptographic algorithms 141 for processing a module encrypted data 403 in subsequent messages 208 and/or responses 209. Server encrypted data 504 in a response 209 may include a security token 401. Security token 401 may be a random string and may also be generated by either server 105 or module 101. If security token 401 is generated by module 101, then security token 401 may be included in message 208 and also utilized by server 105 in response 209, as illustrated in FIG. 6a . Other possibilities exist as well without departing from the scope of the present invention.

FIG. 6b

FIG. 6b is a simplified message flow diagram illustrating an exemplary message received by a server, wherein the message includes a derived module public key, in accordance with exemplary embodiments. As discussed in FIG. 5b , there can be cases where module 101 derives a new module public key 111 and new module private key 112. On example would be the initial creation of the key pairs by module 101, and many other examples could exist as well. FIG. 6b can illustrate an exemplary format and contents of a message 208 for steps 516 and 517 of FIG. 5b . This exemplary message 208 can also help to illustrate the significant differences from conventional technology and improvements for efficient and secure communications by utilizing embodiments contemplated herein.

A message 208 illustrated in FIG. 6b using steps 516 and 517 can include (i) sending new module public key 111, a module public key identity 111 a, a module identity 110, a server instruction 414, a security token 401, and a set of cryptographic parameters 126 associated with the new module public key 111 and/or cryptographic algorithms 141 for using the new module public key 111. Exemplary cryptographic parameters 126 illustrated in FIG. 6b include (i) a secure hash algorithm 141 c to utilize in signatures, which could comprise the SHA 256 algorithm as shown (which may also be known as the SHA-2 algorithm), (ii) a selected elliptic curve for use with ECC algorithms 154 or a modulus to use with RSA algorithms 153, and (iii) a time-to-live value for the public key, such as, but not limited to, the illustrated “time to live” value of 1 year shown in FIG. 6b . The time value for the validity of new module public key 111 could alternatively be specified in a set expiration date. Other values associated with cryptographic algorithms 141 could be included in a set of cryptographic parameters 126 as well, and the illustrated values are intended to be exemplary instead of limiting. In exemplary embodiments, the set of cryptographic parameters 126 in a message 208 could comprise a set of cryptographic parameters 126 depicted and described in connection with step 1105 of FIG. 11 below, and/or FIG. 1 g.

Additional values or fields within a message 208 associated with communicating a new module public key 111 with server 105 could include a server instruction 414 of “new public key”. This server instruction 414 could inform server 105 to utilize the new module public key 111 within the message 208. Module public key identity 111 a can include a sequence number or identity for the new module public key 111, such that module 101 or server 105 can properly reference and/or record the key from a plurality of module public keys 111 that could be associated with module identity 110. Although module public key identity 111 a is illustrated as a separate field in server instruction 414, module public key sequence number 111 a could optionally be included in a set of cryptographic parameters 126, such that the value within cryptographic parameters 126 specifies the current sequence number of module public key identity 111 a for the new module public key 111 included in a message 208.

Other fields and features within a message 208 as illustrated in a FIG. 6b can be similar to the fields presented in FIG. 6a . Since (a) FIG. 6b can also illustrate a first message 208 sent by a module 101 to a server 105, such as after keys are derived in a step 515, then (b) module 101 can read multiple values from RAM 101 e or a nonvolatile memory 101 w or 101 c in order properly construct or format message 208. Each of (i) destination IP:port number 207, (ii) parameters 126, and (iii) shared secret key 510 can preferably be written into nonvolatile memory at step 512 of FIG. 5b , if message 208 in FIG. 6b represents the first message 208 sent by module 101. The source IP:port number 204 can represent a number assigned by an operating system 101 h.

If message 208 in FIG. 6b comprises a subsequent time message 208 is received by server 105 (i.e. not a first time module 101 sends a module public key 111), such as after step 521 illustrated in FIG. 5b , then each of (i) destination IP:port number 207, (ii) parameters 126, and (iii) shared secret key 510 could be updated by server 105 using a module instruction 502 within a server encrypted data 504 before message 208 illustrated in FIG. 6b is received by server 105. In this manner, shared secret key 510 could change from (i) comprising a pre-shared secret key 129 a (for a first message 208 after initial module key derivation) to (ii) comprising a shared secret key that is sent by server 105 within a server encrypted data 504 (for a subsequent message 208 after a subsequent module key derivation).

After receiving message 208, server 105 can use the module identity 110 illustrated in a body 602 of FIG. 6b to select the shared secret key 510 in order authenticate message 208. As described in step 517 of FIG. 5b , server 105 may preferably authenticate message 208 that includes module public key 111 in order to confirm that module public key 111 originated from physical module 101 with a hardware module identity 110 (as opposed to being an imposter submitting the module public key 111). The use of a channel coding 406 is described in connection with FIGS. 4 and 5 a, and channel coding may optionally be omitted. If message 208 comprises a UDP Lite packet, then channel coding may optionally be applied within the body 602. If message 208 comprises a UDP packet, then channel coding may comprise sending the exact same UDP packet 601 a multiple times, such as, but not limited to, an exemplary 3 packets 601 a sent at the same time.

Although not illustrated in FIG. 6b , in an exemplary embodiment module public key 111 could also be received in a message 208, where the module public key 111 and parameters 126 can be included in an encrypted format within a module encrypted data 403. As depicted and described in connection with steps 1001 and 1002 of FIG. 10, and also FIG. 11 of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/039,401, the security of a system 100 and other systems illustrated herein can be further increased by both (i) ciphering module public key 111 and the set of cryptographic parameters 126, and (ii) only sharing the module public key 111 in a confidential manner with server 105 and/or a set of servers 105 n. If module 101 needed a module public key 111 for other purposes, such as, but not limited to, obtaining a certificate, then a second, publicly disclosed module public key 111 could be utilized, where the second module public key 111 is different than a module public key 111 using parameters 126 that is sent to a server 105 in a module encrypted data 403.

FIG. 6b also illustrates an exemplary embodiment, where module public key 111 can be authenticated with server 105 using a module digital signature 405. If message 208 comprises a first time module 101 utilizes a step 516 and step 517, such that a module public key 111 has not previously been sent to server 105 and/or a set of servers 105, then in an exemplary embodiment message 208 could include a module digital signature 405 using the shared secret key 510, which could comprise the pre-shared secret key 129 a. If message 208 comprises a subsequent time module 101 utilizes a step 516 and step 517, such that a module public key 111 has previously been sent to server 105, then message 208 could include a module digital signature 405 using the previous module private key 112 (i.e. not the new module private key 112 associated with the new module public key 111 in the message 208 shown in FIG. 6b ). As noted in FIG. 5b , module digital signature 405 could be omitted, and message 208 with module public key 111 could be authenticated using a message digest algorithm and the shared secret key 129 a. Other possibilities for a module 101 to send a new module public key 111 in a message exist as well without departing from the scope of the present invention.

FIG. 7

FIG. 7 is a simplified message flow diagram illustrating an exemplary system with exemplary data transferred between a module and an application using a server, in accordance with exemplary embodiments. FIG. 7 includes a system 700 and illustrates an exemplary message 208 from a module 101 to a server 105 and also an exemplary application message 701 between an application 171 i and server 105. Note that application message 701 could also be considered as transferred between, sent to, or received from server 105 and application server 171. System 700 can comprise a module 101, a server 105, and an application 171 i operating on an application server 171, and these elements may communicate over a network such as, but not limited to, the Internet 107. For example, application server 171 may utilize an IP:port number 702 for sending and receiving messages with server 105. The IP address within IP:port number 702 is illustrated as an IPv4 address, but an IPv6 address could be utilized as well, or other addressing schemes are possible. Message flows within a module 101 from a sensor 101 f and to an actuator 101 y are also included in a system 700 as illustrated in FIG. 7. Message flows within a module 101 could utilize a system bus 101 d.

As illustrated in FIG. 7, before module 101 sends a module public key 111 to server 105, possibly by using step 516 as illustrated in FIG. 7, module 101 can derive the public and private keys using step 515 and a set of cryptographic parameters 126. Alternatively, in a different embodiment module 101 may have the module public key 111 and module private key 112 generated outside module 101 and loaded into a non-volatile memory 101 w, and in this case step 515 shown can be optionally omitted. Server 105 can utilize step 516 to receive a module public key 111 from module 101. Server 105 can utilize a step 517 and a shared secret key 510 to authenticate a message 208 that contains the module public key 111 from step 516. Authentication of module public key 111 may be preferred in order to ensure that the module public key 111 is properly associated with the correct physical module 101, and prevent an imposter, hacker, etc. from sending in a fake module public key 111 for module 101. After using step 517 to authenticate module public key 111, server 105 can record module public key 111 and associated module identity 110 (plus optionally a module public key identity 111 a) in a module database 105 k. Although not illustrated in FIG. 7, server 105 can also send an application message 701 to application 171 i after successfully recording module public key 111.

Application 171 i operating within an application server 171 can send an application message 701 to server 105, and server 105 can receive the application message 701. Application message 701 could include a module instruction 502, where the module instruction 502 could comprise an actuator setting 706. Although not illustrated in FIG. 7, module instruction 502 as transmitted or sent by application 171 i or application server 171 could include a module identity 110 and/or an actuator identity 152. Actuator setting 706 could include a setting value and an actuator identity 152. As discussed below in connection with FIG. 8, actuator setting 706 within an application message 701 could be received within a secure connection data transfer 802 from application server 171. Thus, in an exemplary embodiment, the actuator setting 706 may preferably not be plaintext as transmitted across a network such as, but not limited to, the Internet 107 between server 105 and application server 171 in an application message 701.

A module instruction 502 (i) from an application 171 i or application server 171, and (ii) within an application message 701 could include other exemplary values or instructions for a module 101, besides the exemplary actuator setting 706. According to exemplary embodiments, a module instruction 502 could comprise information for module 101 such as (i) sleep timers or instructions or values for a CPU wake controller 101 u, (ii) server address 106 or server identity 206 for communicating with a server 105 (such as sending a different server address 106 for module 101 to utilize in future communications), (iii) a new or updated values for set of data reporting steps 101 x, (iv) a new or updated module program 101 i, (v) software or firmware for operating system 101 h and device driver 101 g (including a pointer or reference to a location where the updated module program 101 i could be located), (vi) a calibration value for sensor 101 f or actuator 101 y, (vii) values for a set of cryptographic parameters 126, (viii) software or settings for radio 101 z, (ix) updated cryptographic algorithms 141, (x) a new module private key 112, (xi) a symmetric key 127, (xii) a pre-shared secret key value 129 a for use in communicating with a wireless network 102 (where the pre-shared secret key value 129 a can be the equivalent of a Ki value in a network supporting ETSI/3GPP standards), (xii) a value for a module identity 110, (xiii) a value to use in a channel coding 406, (xiv) a security token 401 or settings for using security tokens, and/or (xv) values for a electronic UICC (eUICC). Other possibilities exist as well for a module instruction 502 without departing from the scope of the present invention. After receiving module instruction 502 in a response 209 from server 105, module 101 could record the data in module instruction 502 within a nonvolatile memory 101 w or RAM 101 e. In an exemplary embodiment, a eUICC received within a module instruction 502 by module 101 could provide the data and parameters for module 101 to connect with another wireless network 102, which could comprise a second PLMN.

After receiving application message 701, server 105 can wait for wait interval 703. As depicted and described in connection with FIGS. 2 and 6 a, firewall 104 may be present in a system 700 and/or other systems depicted in the present invention, and a firewall 104 could block the transmission or sending of packets from server 105 to module 101 at arbitrary times. In addition, according to exemplary preferred embodiments, module 101 can enter periods of sleep or dormancy using a CPU wake controller 101 u in order to conserve energy or the life of a battery 101 k, if present. During periods of sleep or dormancy, module 101 may not be able to receive packets from server 105. Consequently, server 105 can preferably wait for the wait interval 703 as illustrated in FIG. 7, before sending response 209 which could include the module instruction 502. As illustrated in FIG. 7, the module instruction 502 could include an actuator setting 706, but module instruction 502 could include other data as well such as the exemplary module instructions 502 described in the previous paragraph.

According to exemplary embodiments, wait interval 703 can vary depending upon module 101 and monitored unit 119, and wait interval 703 could comprise a wide range of values. Module 101 could send a sensor data 604 b or a report or a message 208 at exemplary reporting intervals such as, but not limited to, every minute, 10 minutes, hour, 6 hours, daily, or longer. Wait interval 703 could be associated with the reporting interval, and the wait interval 703 would end when the next message 208 from module 101 is received. If server 105 supports a plurality of modules 101, wait interval 703 can be associated with the specific module 101 associated with the module instruction 502, possibly by using a module identity 110 in both a message 208 and an application message 701. In other words, server 105 can preferably wait for a message 208 from the specific module 101 associated with the module instruction 502 before sending the response 209 which could include the module instruction 502. Response 209 could be sent using the source and destination IP:port numbers depicted and described in connection with FIG. 2.

Upon the receipt of message 208 from module 101 with module identity 110, the wait interval 703 can end. As illustrated in FIG. 7, message 208 could include a server instruction 414. The server instruction 414 in the exemplary embodiment illustrated in FIG. 7 comprises an “update” server instruction 414, and could include a sensor measurement 604 b and/or a timestamp 604 a. Sensor measurement 604 b could be obtained by module 101 from sensor 101 f before sending message 208, and possibly after module 101 wakes from a dormant state using a CPU wake controller 101 u. Sensor measurement 604 b could be collected by a module program 101 i using a system bus 101 d. As illustrated in FIG. 6a , a server instruction 414 with sensor data 604 b could be within a module encrypted data 403 and received by server 105. Server 105 could utilize the steps illustrated in FIG. 4 to process the received message 208 at the end of wait interval 703. Sensor measurement 604 b as used by module program 101 i, server 105, application 171 i, and/or application server 171 could represent a different string or number at each element, depending upon encoding rules or encoding schemes utilized by each element, but sensor measurement 604 b at each location can represent data or a value collected by a sensor 101 f.

After processing the received message 208 that could include sensor data 604 b and/or timestamp 604 a, server 105 can send application 171 i operating on application server 171 an application message 701 that includes an update instruction 704, where update instruction 704 could include sensor data 604 b, module identity 110, and sensor identity 151, if present. Update instruction 704 could include data other than sensor data 604, such as data pertaining to the state of module 101, including subcomponents illustrated in FIGS. 1b and 1e . Using update instruction 704 or a plurality of update instructions 704, application 171 i can aggregate data to generate reports for presentation to user 183 or make decisions using service controller 171 x. Based on data input in multiple update instructions 704 over time, application 171 i could output module instruction 502 in an application message 701. Application 171 i could record data received in update instruction 704 within an application database 171 k, and process the data using a service controller 171 x in order to automatically generate module instructions 502 using a plurality of sensor data 604 b for a module 101 or a set of modules 101.

After receiving message 208 with server instruction 414, server 105 can send a response 209 to module 101. Note that response 209 is illustrated in FIG. 7 as being sent after sending update instruction 704 to application server 171, but response 209 could also be sent to module 101 before sending update instruction 704 to application server 171. Response 209 can include module instruction 502, where module instruction 502 could comprise the actuator setting 706 server 105 received from application 171 i, according to an exemplary embodiment. Module instruction 502 could also comprise other data besides actuator setting 706 for module 101 in other exemplary embodiments, as outlined above. Although not illustrated in FIG. 7, response 209 could include module instruction 502 within a server encrypted data 503 using the steps depicted and described in connection with FIG. 5a . Module instruction 502 could also include actuator identity 152 associated with actuator setting 706. Response 209 can be formatted as depicted and described in FIGS. 2 and 6 a, such that response 209 can traverse a firewall 104 and be received by module 101 using IP address 204. Network firewall 104 is illustrated as a dashed line in FIG. 7, and may be optionally not be present. But, the use of network firewall 104 may be included in a system 100 and/or system 700 and the presence and operation of a network firewall 104 may be beyond the control of a module 101, server 105, module provider 109, M2M service provider 108, etc., and thus a system 700 can support a firewall 104 in exemplary embodiments. After receiving response 209 with the module instruction 502 and actuator setting 706, module 101 can process the response 209, which could also include server encrypted data 503. Module 101 could extract or read actuator setting 706 from the module instruction 502. Module instruction 502 could include an actuator identity 152. Module 101 can use a module program 101 i to send the actuator setting 706 to the actuator 101 y with actuator identity 152. Actuator setting 706 as sent by module program 101 i may be in a different format or data structure than actuator setting 706 as sent by application 171 i, but both sets of data can achieve the same objective of having an actuator 101 y apply a setting. According to one exemplary embodiment, actuator setting 706 as sent by module program 101 i could be an analog voltage along a system bus 101 d, while actuator setting 706 as sent by application 171 i could be a string or number. Note that as contemplated herein, the term “actuator data” can include or comprise “actuator setting”.

After applying actuator setting 706, actuator 101 y can send an acknowledgement to module program 101 i. Module program 101 i can then send a second message 208 to server 105, where message 208 includes a server instruction 414 of “confirmation”. The server instruction 414 of “confirmation” could be included in a module encrypted data 403 according to a preferred exemplary embodiment. Server 105 can receive the second message 208 with the module encrypted data 403 and decrypt the module encrypted data 403 using a step 413 to extract the server instruction 414 of “confirmation”. The second message 208 may include the actuator identity 152, a timestamp value 604 a, and/or also the module identity 110. Server 105 can send an application message 701 that includes a confirmation 705, where the confirmation can (i) inform application 171 i that the actuator setting 706 sent to server 105 has been properly and/or successfully applied by module 101 and/or actuator 101 y. Confirmation 705 could also include module identity 110 and/or actuator identity 152 and a timestamp value 604 a. Application 171 i could then send an acknowledgement back to server 105 after receiving the confirmation 705.

According to preferred exemplary embodiments, actuator identity 152 is preferably globally unique, such that that including an actuator identity 152 in any packet would allow a server 105 or application 171 i to lookup a module identity 110 and/or module 101 using the actuator identity 152 and a database such as, but not limited to, module database 105 k. Similarly, a sensor identity 151 may be globally unique, according to preferred exemplary embodiments such that a sensor identity 151 in any packet would allow a server 105 or application 171 i to lookup a module identity 110 and/or module 101 using the sensor identity 151 and a database such as, but not limited to, application database 171 k.

FIG. 8

FIG. 8 is a simplified message flow diagram illustrating an exemplary system with exemplary data transferred between a module and an application using a server, in accordance with exemplary embodiments. System 800 can include an application server 171, a server 105, and a module 101 in connected via a network. The network could comprise the Internet 107. Application server 171 could include an application 171 i, where application 171 i can include logic, algorithms, databases, user interfaces, and programs for managing a plurality of modules 101 with a plurality of users 183. Application server 171 and application 171 i may be associated with an M2M service provider 108, and M2M service provider 108 could use application 171 i to provide and manage a service with distributed modules 101 associated with a plurality of monitored units 119. Server 105 could belong to a set of servers 105 n, and the set of servers 105 n could also take the actions described herein for the server 105.

In an exemplary embodiment, module 101 can derive a public key 111 and a private key 112 using step 515. Module 101 can derive the public and private keys using step 515 and a set of cryptographic parameters 126. Alternatively, module 101 may have the module public key 111 and module private key 112 generated outside module 101 and loaded into a non-volatile memory 101 w. Server 105 can utilize step 516 to receive a module public key 111 from module 101. In an exemplary embodiment, module public key 111 in a step 516 illustrated in FIG. 8 can comprises a format of the module public key 111 that is different than a certificate 122 that could record a module public key 111. Module public key 111 in a step 516 could be received in an exemplary format and form illustrated in FIG. 6b above.

Server 105 can utilize a step 517 to authenticate a message 208 that contains the module public key 111 and a module identity 110 received in a step 516. Authentication of module public key 111 may be preferred in order to ensure that the module public key 111 is properly associated with the correct physical module 101 with a module identity 110, and prevent an imposter, hacker, etc. from sending in a fake module public key 111 for module 101. After using step 517 to authenticate module public key 111, server 105 can record module public key 111 with the module identity 110 in a module database 105 k, which could also comprise a shared module database 105 k illustrated in FIG. 1h . Although not illustrated in FIG. 8, server 105 can also send an application message 701 to application 171 i after successfully recording an authenticated module public key 111. Although not illustrated in FIG. 8, a module public key 111 received in step 516 may also include a module public key identity 111 a in order to track which of a plurality of potential module public keys 111 for a module 101 may be used at any given point in time or with any given message 208.

Also, server 105 is not required to receive module public key 111 from module 101 in order to utilize the methods and systems contemplated herein. Instead of receiving module public key 111 in a message 208 from module 101, server 105 could alternatively query another server such as, but not limited to, application server 171 or a server associated with certificate authority 118 for either module public key 111 or a certificate 122 associated with module 101 using a module identity 110, where module identity 110 could be received in a message 208 at a step 516 with or without module public key 111. In addition, server 105 could have a list or database table of module identities 110 and module public keys 111 loaded into a module database 105 k before the message 208 in FIG. 8 is received. After recording module public key 111 and module identity 110, possibly including a module public key identity 111 a, server 105 can wait for wait interval 703. Wait interval 703 could represent the time between reports or messages 208 submitted by module 101, and wait interval 703 for an individual module 101 could comprise a wide range of values from several times a second to several days or longer, depending upon the application and/or monitored unit 119. The wait interval 703 can end when server 105 receives a message 208 from module 101 with a module identity 110.

Module controller 105 x within server 105 can receive a message 208 that includes a server instruction 414 with sensor data 604 b. The sensor data 604 b and/or server instruction 414 could be included in a module encrypted data 403, where decrypting the module encrypted data 403 can use the module public key 111 submitted in step 516 above and derived by module 101 in step 515. According to one exemplary embodiment, module encrypted data 403 could be ciphered with a symmetric key 127 that is a derived shared key 129 b from a key derivation function 141 f and module public key 111 received in step 516 (and also server public key 114). Module controller 105 x can process message 208 using the steps depicted and described in connection with FIG. 4 in order to decrypt the module encrypted data 403 and obtain the plaintext server instruction 414 and plaintext sensor data 604 b. Although sensor data 604 b is illustrated as the server instruction 414 in FIG. 8, server instruction 414 could have other values such data associated with any of the components for module 101 illustrated in FIG. 1b and FIG. 1e . Server instruction 414 could be a “query” where module 101 queries for information from server 105 or application 171 i, or server instruction 414 could be an alarm or error notification outside a regular reporting interval. Other possibilities for server instruction 414 exist without departing from the scope of the present invention. In an exemplary embodiment, server instruction 414 could also be a periodic “registration” message with no subsystem data for module 101 (an also no sensor data 604 b), and a “registration” could be a message for server 105 indicating module 101 is awake and online with Internet 107.

Server 105 can establish a secure connection with application server 171 and application 171 i using a secure connection setup 801 and a secure connection data transfer 802. Server 105 can utilize an application interface 105 i to manage the communication with application 171 i and/or application server 171, while a module controller 105 x can manage communication with a module 101. Alternatively, application interface 105 i and module controller 105 x can be optionally combined or omitted, such that server 105 and/or a set of servers 105 n perform the actions illustrated in FIG. 8 for application interface 105 i and module controller 105 x. Likewise, server 105 and application 171 could be combined or operate on the same local area network (LAN) and thus not be connected via the Internet 107. If server 105 and application 171 are nodes within the same LAN or virtual private network (VPN), then the network connection can also be considered a secure connection (without using encryption between the nodes), since packets routed between the nodes may not need to traverse the Internet 107 and thus the network layer could provide security. Although secure connection setup 801 is illustrated in FIG. 8 as occurring after message 208 is received by server 105, secure connection setup 801 could take place before message 208 is received by server 105. Secure connection setup 801 could utilize a secure protocol such as, but not limited to, TLS, Secure Sockets Layer (SSL), IPSec, or VPN to establish a secure connection between server 105 and application 171 i and/or application server 171, such that data transferred between the two nodes is encrypted and also not subject to replay attacks. As contemplated herein, a secure connection can comprise any of a TLS connection, an IPSec connection, a VPN connection, an encrypted connection, and/or a LAN connection between server 105 and application server 171 and/or application 171 i, and other possibilities exist as well without departing from the scope of the present invention.

Other secure connections may be utilized as well, including a secure shell (SSH) tunnel, future versions of standard secure connections, or also a proprietary protocol for a secure connection. Secure connection setup 801 as illustrated in FIG. 8 may utilize a TLS protocol, such as, but not limited to, TLS version 1.2, TLS version 1.3, etc. Secure connection setup 801 can include the transfer of a certificate 122 for application server 171, and also the transfer of an application public key 171 w. Server 105 can utilize application public key 171 w to encrypt data received from module 101 in a message 208, such as, but not limited to, sensor data 604 b. According to one exemplary embodiment, application message 701 could be ciphered with a symmetric key 127 that comprises a derived shared key 129 b from at least (i) a key derivation function 141 f, (ii) application public key 171 w and server public key 114, and (iii) a random number 128 a from either server 105 or application server 171.

The message flow in a secure connection setup 801 also illustrates one benefit of the present invention, where a message 208 can be securely transferred between module 101 and server 105 using a single UDP datagram (or less than 3-4 datagrams), while secure connection setup 801 may require a plurality of TCP messages in both directions. In other words, using a secure connection setup 801 as illustrated in FIG. 8 between module 101 and server 105 may not be energy efficient for module 101, while using secure connection setup 801 between server 105 and application server 171 can be efficient, since the data from a plurality of modules 101 can be shared over the secure connection setup 801. Also note that since module 101 may sleep for relatively long periods such as, but not limited to, 30 minutes or longer, a new secure connection setup 801 would likely be required to support a firewall 104 after each period of sleep, and completing the process of a secure connection setup 801 each time module 101 wakes may not be energy or bandwidth efficient for a module 101.

After completing server connection setup 801, in exemplary embodiments server 105 or a set of servers 105 can use a secure connection data transfer 802 to send a first application message 701, where the first application message 701 could include update instruction 704 that includes sensor data 604 b that server 105 received in a message 208. Data within the first application message 701 containing update instruction 704 could be ciphered according to the specifications of the secure connection, such as, but not limited to, TLS or IPSec, and other possibilities exist as well. Note that server 105 can decrypt a module encrypted data 403 that includes sensor data 604 b and subsequently encrypt the sensor data 604 b according to the format required by secure connection setup 801 for transfer to application 171 i using secure connection data transfer 802. System 700 can use two different server public keys 114, recorded in the form of a certificate 122 in one embodiment, with a first server public key 114 used in encrypting and/or decryption module encrypted data 403 and a second server public key 114 used in encrypting and/or decrypting update instruction 704. The two server public keys 114 can be used by server 105 in a key derivation function 141 f to derive two shared secret keys 129 b used in a symmetric ciphering algorithm 141 b for both secure connection data transfer 802 and module encrypted data 403 (with a different derived shared public key 129 b with module 101 and application server 171, respectively).

In another embodiment, server 105 can use the same server public key 114 to both decrypt module encrypted data 403 and encrypt update instruction 704. Other possibilities exist as well for server 105 to use a server public key 114 to (i) encrypt update instruction 704, such as using an asymmetric ciphering algorithm 141 a, and (ii) decrypt module encrypted data 403 without departing from the scope of the present invention. As illustrated in FIG. 8, server 105 can receive an acknowledgement 804 after sending the first application message 701, with update instruction 704 that includes sensor data 604 b, where acknowledgement 804 can signal that application message 701 with update instruction 704 has been received by application 171 i and/or application server 171. Although not illustrated in FIG. 8, the acknowledgement 804 could optionally include a module instruction 502 for module 101. As contemplated herein, a module instruction 502 can also include a timestamp value 604 a, such that a module 101 can determine when the module instruction 502 was generated or processed by a source of the module instruction 502 such as an application 171 i or a server 105.

After receiving message 208, server 105 can then send a response 209. Response 209 could be sent before or after server 105 sends update instruction 704 to application 171 i using secure connection data transfer 802. Response 209 can include a server encrypted data 504 that includes a module instruction 502. Module instruction 502 could be (i) processed by server 105, (ii) obtained by server 105 from application 171 i in an application instruction 701, and/or (iii) read by server 105 from a shared module database 105 k. In other words, a secure connection data transfer 802 may be utilized by a server 105 and either (i) an application server 171 or (ii) a shared module database 105 k to in order for server 105 or a set of servers 105 n to receive a module instruction 502 with a module identity 110 for a module 101. According to an exemplary preferred embodiment, server 105 waits for a response or acknowledgement 804 from application 171 i to application message 701 (where application message 701 could comprise a polling request 1302 described below) before sending response 209 to module 101. One reason for waiting for a response or acknowledgement 804 from application 171 i is that response or acknowledgement 804 from application 171 i could include a module instruction 502, and the module instruction 502 may preferably be included in a response 209. Other possibilities exist as well without departing from the scope of the present invention.

FIG. 8 can also illustrate a benefit of an exemplary embodiment contemplated herein. According to an exemplary embodiment, (i) server 105 and application server 171 can utilize a first set of cryptographic algorithms 141 for sending and receiving data between server 105 and application server 171, such as, but not limited to, with a secure connection data transfer 802, and (ii) server 105 and module 101 can utilize a second set of cryptographic algorithms 141 for sending and receiving data between server 105 and module 101, such as using the second set of cryptographic algorithms 141 for a module encrypted data 403 and/or server encrypted data 504. In an exemplary embodiment, server 105 and application server 171 can use RSA algorithms 153 in the first set of cryptographic algorithms 141, while server 105 and module 101 can use ECC algorithms 154 in the second set of cryptographic algorithms 141. As one example, server 105 can use an (i) RSA-based asymmetric ciphering algorithm 141 b and first server public key 114 with the application server 171 to securely transfer a first symmetric key 127 with application server 171, and (ii) an ECC-based asymmetric ciphering algorithm 141 b and second server public key 114 with the module 101 to securely transfer a second symmetric key 127 with a module 101.

Other possibilities exist as well for a server 105 to use a different cryptographic algorithms 141 and/or cryptographic parameters 126 for each of application server 171 and module 101. (A) Server 105 and application server 171 could use a first set of cryptographic parameters 126 for use with cryptographic algorithms 141 for an application message 701 with related server digital signatures, while (B) server 105 and module 101 could use a second set of cryptographic parameters 126 for use with cryptographic algorithms 141 for a module encrypted data 403 and/or server encrypted data 504 and related digital signatures. The first set of cryptographic parameters 126 and the second set of cryptographic parameters 126 are illustrated in FIG. 8. In order to maximize security between servers such as server 105 and application server 171, the first set of parameters 126 could specify (i) a longer public and private key length, (ii) a shorter key expiration time 133, (iii) a longer secure hash algorithm (such as, but not limited to, an exemplary 384 or 512 bits), (iv) a longer symmetric ciphering key 127 length (such as, but not limited to, an exemplary 192 or 256 bits), (v) the use of or values for RSA algorithm 153 and a modulus, (vi) the use of Diffie Hellman key exchange or a first key exchange algorithm for a key derivation function 141 f and key exchange, (vii) the use of or values for a second symmetric ciphering algorithm 141 b for symmetric ciphering, (viii) the use of or values for an RSA digital signature algorithm or a second digital signature algorithm, and similar settings.

In accordance with a preferred exemplary embodiment, in order to minimize processing power and/or energy usage required for a module 101, the second set of cryptographic parameters 126 illustrated in FIG. 8 could specify (i) a shorter public and private key length, (ii) a longer key expiration time 133, (iii) a shorter secure hash algorithm (such as, but not limited to, an exemplary 224, 256, or 160 bits), (iv) a shorter symmetric ciphering key 127 length (such as, but not limited to, an exemplary 128 bits), and (v) the use of an ECC algorithm 154, (vi) the use of or values for an ECC standard curve 138 and/or ECC parameters 137, (vii) the use of or values for ECDH 159 or a second key exchange algorithm for key derivation and exchange, (vii) the use of or values for of a second symmetric ciphering algorithm 141 b for symmetric ciphering, (viii) the use of or values for of ECDSA 158 or a second digital signature algorithm for digital signatures, and similar settings. In an embodiment, the first set of parameters 126 (which can be used by server 105 and application server 171) and the second set of parameters 126 (which can be used by server 105 and module 101) can both specify the use of elliptic curve cryptographic algorithms 141, but with different sets of parameters 126 such that the first set of parameters 126 is selected for server to server communications, and the second set of parameters 126 is selected for communications between a server 105 and a module 101. In another embodiment, the first set of parameters 126 and the second set of parameters 126 can both specify the use of RSA based cryptographic algorithms 141, but with different sets of parameters 126 such that the first set of parameters 126 is selected for server to server communications, and the second set of parameters 126 is selected for communications between a server 105 and a module 101.

In this manner, the use of cryptographic algorithms 141 between (i) server 105 and application server 171 and (ii) server 105 and module 101 can be optimized given different constraints for processing power and energy consumption for server 105, application server 171, and a module 101. In addition, an application server 171 may use cryptographic algorithms 141 and parameters 126 that may not be compatible with cryptographic algorithms 141 and parameters 126 used by a module 101, and server 105 can use cryptographic algorithms 141 and at least the two sets of cryptographic parameters 126 illustrated in FIG. 8 to enable a translation or conversion of encrypted data and digital signatures between a module 101 and an application server 171, thereby establishing connectivity between a module 101 and an application server 171 through a server 105. According to an exemplary embodiment, server 105 can function as a gateway between application server 171 and/or application 171 i and a plurality of modules 101.

FIG. 9

FIG. 9 is a simplified message flow diagram illustrating exemplary data transferred between (i) a server and an application and between (ii) a server and a module, in accordance with exemplary embodiments. An application server 171, a server 105, and a module 101 can send and receive data illustrated in FIG. 9. Application server 171 can include application 171 i and use an Internet Protocol address and port (IP:port) number 903 for sending and receiving data with server 105. Server 105 can include an application interface 105 i and a module controller 105 x, where application interface 105 i can access a first server IP:port number 901 for communicating with application server 171, and module controller 105 x can access a second server IP:port number 207 for communication with module 101. In accordance with a preferred exemplary embodiment, multiple modules 101 can send data to server IP:port number 207, and thus server 105 and/or a module controller 105 x can use a single IP:port number 207 to communicate with a plurality of modules 101. In addition, server 105 could specify that one subset of modules 101 communicate with a first IP:port number 207, and a second subset of modules 101 communicate with a second IP:port number 207, etc. In another embodiment, a set of servers 105 n could comprise the server 105 illustrated in FIG. 8. Module 101 can utilize an IP:port number 204 for sending and receiving data with a server 105.

As illustrated in FIG. 9, a symmetric firewall 104 could be included between module 101 and server 105. The of IP addresses and port numbers in packets between server 105 and module 101 illustrated in FIG. 9 could also represent routing if a firewall 104 is present and functions as a symmetric firewall without NAT routing. In this case, firewall 104 may not perform network address translation on source and destination IP addresses and/or port numbers, but rather filter packets based on pre-determined rules. For example, a firewall 104 that is a symmetric firewall could drop inbound packets from IP:port number 207 to module 101 unless module 101 had previously sent a packet to IP:port number 207 within a firewall port binding timeout value 117. Alternatively, a firewall 104 may be optionally omitted, and in this case the destination address in packets sent from server 105 to module 101 could include the IP address 202 of module 101, which is also the case illustrated in FIG. 9. In other words, FIG. 9 illustrates an exemplary routing of packets in the cases that (i) firewall 104 is a symmetric firewall, and (ii) firewall 104 is optionally not present.

Server 105 can receive a message 208 from a module 101. Server 105 can use a module controller 105 x to receive the message, and module controller 105 x could also be identified as a process operating on server 105 that binds to the port number in IP:port 207, which could include a port number 205. Message 208 could include module identity string 904, which could represent a temporary or transient string or number used by module 101 and server 105 to associate and identify message 208 with module identity 110. Module identity string 904 could also comprise a module identity 110. Server 105 can use module identity string 904 to select a symmetric key 127 in order to decrypt module encrypted data 403, since module identity string 904 may preferably be not encrypted. Server 105 and module 101 could use an algorithm within cryptographic algorithms 141 in order to process a module identity string 904, whereby the module identity string 904 can be converted between (i) a module identity 110 in a form such as, but not limited to, a serial number, IMEI, or related identifier for module 101, and (ii) a module identity string 904 in a message 208 that can traverse the Internet 107.

Message 208 as received by server 105 can also include a server instruction 414 within a module encrypted data 403, where the module encrypted data 403 could be ciphered using a symmetric key 127. The server instruction 414 illustrated in FIG. 9 can be an exemplary “update” instruction, where the “update” instruction can include a security token 401 and sensor data 604 b. Sensor data 604 b can include a sensor identity 151 and a sensor measurement. Server instruction 414 within a message 208 could include many other values besides an update, including a registration, a query, an alarm or error notification, configuration request, software request, confirmation, or other values also depicted and described in connection with a server instruction 414 in FIG. 4. A security token 401 can comprise a random number 128 a processed by a random number generator 128 and can be preferably not reused and therefore can keep message 208 unique and not subject to replay attacks. In exemplary embodiments, a UDP protocol may be implemented for message 208, and the connectionless UDP protocol may require a module 101 to send retransmissions of a UDP datagram 601 a for message 208, if module 101 does not receive a response 209 within a specified timer period.

If the UDP Lite protocol is utilized for message 208, with multiple copies of UDP Lite datagram 601 a received in an exemplary embodiment, then each UDP Lite datagram 601 a could be different, depending on the presence of bit errors in the datagram, and thus server 105 can use timer 905 to collect the multiple copies of UDP Lite datagram 601 a within the timer 905 period and process the multiple packets received, including combining the data across multiple packets, in order to eliminate bit errors within the datagrams and collect an error-free message 208. Packets for a message 208 received outside timer 905 could be dropped by server 105, and the timer 905 could start when the first datagram 601 a for a message 208 was received by server 105.

After receiving message 208, server 105 use the steps outlined in FIG. 5a to process message 208 and read the plaintext server instruction 414, such as, but not limited to, the sensor data 604 b illustrated in FIG. 9. Other possibilities exist as well for sensor data 604 b or values or information inside a server instruction 414. Server 105 can then send or transmit a first application message 701 to application server 171 that includes data received from the server instruction 414 from module 101 in message 208. The data received in the server instruction 414 from module 101 could be included by server 105 in an update instruction 704. An application 171 i operating within application server 171 or associated with application server 171 could receive the first application message 701. The first application message 701 could be formatted according to a TCP datagram 902, although other possibilities exist as well including UDP.

In accordance with an exemplary preferred embodiment, the first application message 701 may include an update instruction 704 with sensor data 604 b, although update instruction 704 could also contain or include other data pertaining to module 101 besides sensor data 604 b, such as a state of a component with module 101, a state of a software routine, variable, or parameter associated with module 101. The first application message 701 sent from server 105 to application server 171 could be a datagram within a secure connection data transfer 802 as illustrated in FIG. 8. Sensor data 604 b could be sent by server 105 using application server public key 171 w, such as either (i) mutually deriving a common shared key 129 b between server 105 and application 171 i using a key derivation function 141 f, where the shared key 129 b could function as a symmetric key 127 with a symmetric ciphering algorithm 141 b, or (ii) server 105 sending a symmetric key 127 to application server 171 using an asymmetric ciphering algorithm 141 a and the application server public key 171 w. Message 805 in FIG. 8 with the label of “Client Key Exchange” can comprise server 105 sending a symmetric key 127 (or value or cryptographic parameters 126 for deriving symmetric key 127) to application server 171, where the symmetric key 127 can be used by server 105 to encrypt update instruction 704 illustrated in FIG. 9. As contemplated herein, a random number 128 a input into a set of cryptographic algorithms 141 d can also be considered a cryptographic parameter 126. Also, a random number 128 a input into a key derivation function 141 f can comprise a cryptographic parameter 126.

In accordance with an exemplary preferred embodiment, application message 701 may include (i) module identity 110 encrypted within secure connection data transfer 802 and also a server identity 206 that is not encrypted. In this manner, application server 171 can use server identity 206 to select a symmetric key 127 (possibly sent in message 805 as described in the paragraph above) in order to decrypt the encrypted data in update instruction 704. Application server 171 can receive the first application message 701 sent by server 105 and process the message. The message processing by application server 171 could use steps similar or equivalent to the steps utilized by server 105 illustrated in FIG. 4, in order to extract a plaintext application instruction 704. Although not illustrated in FIG. 9, application 171 i could record data received within application instruction 704 and record the data in an application database 171 k. Application 171 i could use the data received in application instruction 704 or a plurality of application instructions 704 to generate reports, graphs, emails, or other user information for a user 183.

Upon processing the information within application instruction 704, application 171 i or application server 171 could send a second application message 701 to server 105, as illustrated in FIG. 9. The second application message 701 could be sent using a secure connection data transfer 802, and could include a module instruction 502 and a module identity 110. The second application message 701 can use the IP:port number 903 as a source IP:port number for the second application message 701, where IP:port number 903 also represented a destination IP:port number for the first application message 701. The second application message 701 can use the IP:port number 901 as the destination IP:port number, where IP:port number 901 was the source port number in the first application message 701. The module instruction 502 within the second application message 701 could include an actuator setting 706. The module instruction 502 within the second application message 701 can comprise other data or module instructions 502 for a module 101 that do not include an actuator setting 706, such as the exemplary data depicted and described in connection with FIG. 5 a.

Server 105 or a set of servers 105 n can receive the second application message 701, and the message could be received using an IP:port number 901. Although an IPv4 address is shown in FIG. 9, and IPv6 address could be utilized as well. Server 105 could decrypt a body 602, that contains module identity 110 and a module instruction 502, using algorithms specified according to a secure connection data transfer 802. As depicted and described in FIG. 8, a first set of cryptographic parameters 126 with cryptographic algorithms 141 could be used with an application message 701 and a second set of cryptographic parameters 126 with cryptographic algorithms 141 could be used with server encrypted data 504 and/or module encrypted data 403.

After extracting a plaintext module instruction 502 and module identity 110 from a body 602 in the second application message 701, server 105 can take steps to process the data and create a response 209 for module 101. Server 105 can record or query for information pertaining to module 101 using module identity 110 in a module database 105 k. In accordance with exemplary embodiments, server 105 can use module identity 110 received in the second application message 701 to select (i) a symmetric key 127 used by module 101 for encrypting and/or decrypting a server encrypted data 504 that can include the module instruction 502, (ii) a destination IP:port number 204 for sending a response 209, (iii) a source IP:port number 207 for sending a response 209, (iv) a determination if a wait interval 703 is required before sending response 209, (v) a value for a security token 401, and (vi) at least one value for a set of cryptographic parameters 126 for use with a cryptographic algorithms 141 in communications with module 101. In one embodiment, different modules 101 connected to server 105 may use different cryptographic parameters 126, and server 105 can select the appropriate set of cryptographic parameters 126 for a module 101 using (a) the module identity 110 received in the second application message and (b) a module database 105 k. Server 105 can also use module identity 110 received in the second application message 701 to select (vii) a transport protocol for a response 209, such as, but not limited to, TCP, UDP, or UDP Light, and (viii) a channel coding 406 parameter such as, but not limited to, a block code, turbo code, or forward error correction coding scheme. Server 105 can use module identity 110 received in an application message 701 such as the second application message 701 illustrated in FIG. 9 to format and/or send a response 209 to module 101.

According to a preferred exemplary embodiment, server 105 may receive an application message 701 with data for a module 101 at arbitrary times. According to a preferred exemplary embodiment, server 105 can use module identity 110 received within an application message 701 to determine (i) if server 105 should wait until a wait interval 703 expires before sending response 209 (where the wait interval 703 can end upon receipt of a message 208 from a module 101 with the module identity 110 received in the application message 701) or (ii) if server 105 can send response 209 right away (such as a firewall port binding timeout period 117 has not expired), where response 209 includes the module instruction 502 received in the application message 701. Firewall port binding timeout value 117 (or a time value associated with firewall port binding timeout value) can be recorded for module identity 110 in a module database 105 k.

After (A) using module identity 110 received within application message 701 to select values to process a response 209 and timing for sending a response 209, then (B) server 105 can send response 209 as illustrated in FIG. 9, where the specific response 209 in FIG. 9 is exemplary. Response 209 can include a server encrypted data 504. Server encrypted data 504 can include module instruction 502. The exemplary response 209 illustrated in FIG. 9 includes an actuator setting 706 within module instruction 502, but other possibilities exist as well. Note that the use of server encrypted data 504 is optional within a response 209, and server 105 could send module instruction 502 as plaintext. However, in this case of module instruction 502 being sent as plaintext, server 105 can preferably include a server digital signature 506 such that module 101 can verify the server digital signature 506 using the server public key 114 and confirm the module instruction 502 was transmitted by server 105. In accordance with exemplary preferred embodiments, (i) a message from module 101 to server 105 that does not include a module encrypted data 403 preferably includes a module digital signature 405, and (ii) a response 209, message sent back, datagram, or packet from server 105 to module 101 that does not include a server encrypted data 504 preferably includes a server digital signature 506. If data is not encrypted within a packet and the packet includes plaintext instructions such as a module instruction 502 or a server instruction 414, then, in accordance with preferred exemplary embodiments, the receiving node can preferably verify the identity of a sender using (i) a digital signature, (ii) an identity, and (iii) a public key, where the digital signature and identity can be included in the packet.

Response 209 sent from server 105 to module 101 could include a checksum 603. Since firewall 104 may comprise a symmetric firewall 104 (that may not perform network address translation routing), the destination address within IP:port 204 in response 209 illustrated in FIG. 9 may match the IP address 202 used by module 101. In this case, where the destination IP:port in response 209 includes IP address 202, a checksum 603 sent by server 105 can be equal to a checksum 603 received by module 101. In accordance with exemplary embodiments, response 209 is transmitted or sent by server 105 within a firewall port binding timeout value 117 after message 208 was received by server 105. In other words, if a firewall port binding timeout value 117 was equal to an exemplary 20 seconds for UDP packets, the response 209 illustrated in FIG. 9 would preferably be sent in less than 20 seconds after receiving the previous message 208.

FIG. 10

FIG. 10 is a flow chart illustrating exemplary steps for a set of servers to communicate with a module, in accordance with exemplary embodiments. The exemplary steps illustrated in FIG. 10 could be implemented in either a collection of servers 105 (such as, but not limited to, the two exemplary servers illustrated in FIG. 1h ), where the collection of servers 105 comprise a set of servers 105 n. Or, a set of servers 105 n can comprise a single server 105 with only one member in the set of servers 105. The members and numbers of servers 105 in a set of servers 105 n can also change over time. In other words, over time such as when a plurality of module public keys 111 could be generated for various needs of a module 101 or a system such as, but not limited to, system 100, module 101 may communicate with multiple servers in some embodiments.

FIG. 10 illustrates an exemplary embodiment where a set of servers 105 n can authenticate module 101 using a module identity 110 and subsequently receive a plurality of module public keys 111 over time. As depicted and described in FIG. 1h , a set of servers 105 n can comprise at least on server 105. New module public keys 111 are generated for the various purposes contemplated herein, including (i) periodically rotating module private keys 112 for security, (ii) changing a set of cryptographic parameters 126 used with the keys in order to increase security (where a new set of cryptographic parameters 126 can require the use of a new module public key 111 and new module private key 112), (iii) change of ownership and/or control of module 101 such that the previous module private key 112 may not longer be considered secure, and (iv) the first time module 101 sends in a module public key 111. Other possibilities for reasons that a set of servers 105 n can receive and authenticate and/or verify a module public key 111 are possible as well without departing from the scope of the present invention.

At step 1001, a server 105 and/or a set of servers 105 n can receive and verify a module public key 111 is associated with a module identity 110 that is recorded within server 105, potentially in a module database 105 k. Module database 105 k could also be a shared module database 105 k as illustrated in FIG. 1h . The module public key 111 could be received from module 101 in a message 208 that includes the module identity 110. If a server 105 has not previously record module identity 110 received in a message 208 at step 1001, potentially in a module database 105 k, then server 105 could query for data to authenticate module public key 111 with module identity at step 1001. A server 105 could query other servers such as, but not limited to, an application server 171, a certificate authority 118, and/or a server associated with M2M service provider 108 or module provider 109. The other exemplary servers listed in the previous sentence could also comprise members of a set of servers 105 n in some embodiments, but in other embodiments an application server 171 and a certificate authority 118, etc. may not be members of the set of servers 105. Exemplary details for the steps to verify a received module public key 111 are also depicted and described in connection with step 1202 of FIG. 12, and step 517 of FIG. 5b . In accordance with an exemplary embodiment, the received module public key 111 can be verified using any of a shared secret key 510, a module digital signature 405, or a certificate 122. A server 105 could also use an initial set of cryptographic parameters 126 at step 1001, where the initial set or first set of cryptographic parameters 126 could be pre-agreed between module 101 (possibly through module provider 109) and server 105 (possibly through M2M service provider 108).

According to an exemplary preferred embodiment, (i) the first time a server 105, including any server in a set of servers 105, receives any module public key 111 for module identity 110, the module public key 111 can be verified using a certificate 122, and (ii) a subsequent time server 105 receives a module public key 111 for module identity 110, the module public key 111 can be verified using either a shared secret key 510 or a module digital signature 405, where (i) the module digital signature 405 is processed by server 105 using a prior module public key 111 (i.e. received before step 1001), and (ii) the prior module public key 111 had also been previously verified. In the embodiment where a received module public key 111 at step 1001 is verified using a prior module public key 111 and a module digital signature 405 (as contemplated in the previous sentence), a message 208 including the module digital signature 405 may also preferably include a module public key identity 111 a such that server 105 can properly lookup, query, or obtain the correct prior module public key 111 with module public key identity 111 a to use with a digital signature algorithms 141 d to verify the module digital signature 405 received in the message 208. In other words, when a plurality of module public keys 111 may be utilized, server 105, possibly within a set of servers 105 n, can use a module public key identity 111 a to track which module public key 111 is currently being used with either a module digital signature 405 or an asymmetric ciphering algorithms 141 a.

After receiving and verifying module public key 111 and module identity 110 at step 1001, a server 105 and/or a set of servers 105 n can receive a message 208 that includes module identity 110 at step 1002. The message 208 could include a server instruction 414 or a module encrypted data 403. In an exemplary embodiment, server 105 can receive other messages 208 and module public keys 111 both before and after steps 1001 and step 1002, as well as other steps contemplated herein. In other words, the various messages and responses illustrated in Figures herein can comprise subsets of all messages and responses, such that the subsets comprise embodiments of the present invention. At step 1003, server 105 can send a response 209, where the response can include a second set of cryptographic parameters 126. The response 209 can be sent in a packet with a source IP:port number and a destination IP:port number, and the destination IP:port number in the packet can be equal to or the same as the source IP:port number for a packet received in message 208 at step 1002.

In an exemplary embodiment, the second set of cryptographic parameters 126 are sent to a module 101 with module identity 110 only after the module public key 111 has been verified in a step 1001. In this manner, the cryptographic parameters 126 may be more securely held (i.e. not disclosed to unauthorized parties). Further, the cryptographic parameters 126 in a response 209 sent at step 1003 may also optionally be encrypted using the module public key 111 received at step 1001. In one embodiment, the module public key 111 received in step 1001 can be used to derive or transfer a symmetric key 127, and the symmetric key 127 could be used with a symmetric ciphering algorithms 141 b to cipher the second cryptographic parameters 126 sent in a response 126.

At step 1004, a set of servers 105 n can receive over time a series of module public keys 111 associated with module 101 using module identity 110. Members of the series of module public keys 111 can be different, representing different module public keys 111 for the module identity 110, and the numbers and/or strings in the module public keys 111 can be different. The series of different module public keys 111 can comprise at least a first module public key 111 for module identity 110 and a second module public key 111 for module identity 110, where the two module public keys 111 are received at different times, such as, but not limited to, exemplary values of a week, a month, or a year apart, and other times between members of the series of module public keys are possible as well. An exemplary format for a server 105 to receive a module public key 111 is illustrated in the exemplary message 208 depicted and described in connection with FIG. 6b , and other possibilities exist as well. Different members of the set of servers 105 n can receive different module public keys 111 in the series of module public keys 111 for the module identity 110. Although not illustrated in FIG. 10, the set of servers 105 n can also receive additional messages 208 and send additional responses 209 during step 1004, such as when module 101 and the set of servers 105 n continue to operate over time until step 1005 below. The module identity 110 received with a first module public key 111 in the series may have a different value, string, or number than the module identity 110 received with a second module public key 111 in the series, but different values, strings, or numbers for module identity 110 can used for the same physical module 101, and the different values for module identity 110 can be associated with a unique serial number for a module 101, and other possibilities exist as well.

A module 101 could generate, process, or derive each of the different module public keys 111 in the series of different module public keys 111 using a set of cryptographic algorithms 141, the cryptographic parameters 126 sent at step 1003, and a random number generator 128. Each member of the series of module public keys 111 could be received in a message 208 that could also include a module public key identity 111 a in order to track the module public keys 111. In an exemplary embodiment, a server 105 at step 1004 can also receive a third set of cryptographic parameters 126 from module 101, such that the third set of cryptographic parameters 126 received can specify how server 105 can use a set of cryptographic algorithms 141 in order to either (i) use at least one module public key 111 in the series form step 1004, and/or (ii) communicate with module 101. The third set of cryptographic parameters 126 could be sent in a module encrypted data 403. Note that the second set of cryptographic parameters 126 sent by a server 105 at step 1003 could intersect with a third set of cryptographic parameters 126 received by server 105 with a module public key 111 at step 1004.

In an exemplary embodiment, a second set of cryptographic parameters 126 sent by a server 105 at step 1003 could include a list of secure hash algorithms, and elliptic curve names, and a third set of cryptographic parameters received by server 105 in a step 1004 can include a selection by module 101 of a specific secure hash algorithm and an elliptic curve name from the first set of cryptographic parameters. Other possibilities exist as well, and each of the second set and third set of cryptographic parameters 126 can include more than a list of secure hash algorithms and elliptic curve names, such as but not limited to (i) the name or value for a symmetric ciphering algorithm 141 b, (ii) parameters or values for a module random seed file 139, (iii) the name or value for an asymmetric ciphering algorithm 141 a, (iv) the name or value for a digital signature algorithm 141 d, (iv) a value for a key pair generation algorithm, and/or (v) a value for a key derivation function 141 f. The selection of the third set of cryptographic parameters 126 by module 101 could be made based on the capabilities of cryptographic algorithms 141 in a module 101. In an exemplary embodiment, the third set of cryptographic parameters 126 received by server 105 at step 1004 comprises a subset of the second cryptographic parameters 126 sent by server 105 at step 1003. After receiving the second cryptographic parameters at step 1004, server 105 can record and implement the third set of cryptographic parameters 126 in future communications with module 101 (until possibly a different or new third set of cryptographic parameters 126 are possibly received by a server 105 in a message 208 at a future time). Note that the use of a third set of cryptographic parameters 126 at step 1004 may optionally be omitted (as illustrated in FIG. 10), such that the second set of cryptographic parameters 126 from step 1003 are used by module 101 at step 1004.

At step 1005, a server 105, possibly in the set of servers 105, can receive a module instruction 502 and a module identity 110. In one embodiment, server 105 could poll another server, process, or database in order to receive the module instruction 502 and module identity 110, such as, but not limited to, sending a polling request or query in a step 1302 depicted and described below in connection with FIG. 13 and FIG. 14. The response received to the poll or query could be the receipt of a module instruction 502 and module identity 110 in a step 1005, possibly through using a step 1303 illustrated in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14. In another embodiment for step 1005, a server 105 could receive an application message 701 from an application server 171, where the application message 701 can include the module instruction 502 and the module identity 110. The module instruction 502 for module 101 with module identity 110 could be for any reason that application 171 i and/or user 183 prefers to change a state of module 101, including the exemplary reasons depicted and described in connection with FIG. 7. By receiving module instruction 502, server 105 can enable the remote or external control of a module 101, which may be important for successful operation of module 101. At step 1005, server 105 can record module instruction 502 in memory 105 e or a module database 105 k.

Although not illustrated in FIG. 10, for the embodiment where server 105 receives a module instruction 502 in an application message 701 from application server 171, server 105 could then use a wait interval 703, to wait for the next message 208 from module 101. A wait interval 703 as depicted and described in connection with FIG. 7, and server 105 can wait after step 1005 and before step 1006, or until a next message 208 is received with the module identity 110. In many embodiments, module 101 may not be continuously connected with server 105 due to any of (i) the use of sleep or dormant states, (ii) periodic outages of network connectivity through a network 102 and/or the Internet 107, and/or (iii) firewall rules on a firewall 104 that would prevent outbound packets from server 105 from reaching module 101. Although not illustrated in FIG. 10, server 105 could attempt to send a packet such as datagram 601 b to module 101 at step 703 in FIG. 10, and if module 101 does not send back a message 208 with a server instruction 414 of a confirmation and/or acknowledgement (potentially for the reasons listed in the above sentence), then server 105 could also then continue to wait using a wait interval 703.

At step 1006, server 105 can receive the next message 208 from module 101, where message 208 preferably includes the module identity 110 and the module identity 110 can correspond to the module identity 110 received at steps 1005, 1004, and 1001. The next message 208 illustrated in Figure at step 1006 could be for any reason. Server 105 can use the receipt of next message 208 at step 1006 as confirmation that module 101 is in an active state and that communication is possible through the Internet 107, firewall 104, and network 102. The next message 208 at step 1006 may preferably include at least one of (i) module encrypted data 403 that is ciphered with a symmetric key 127 and (ii) a module digital signature 405. In this manner, server 105 can verify or confirm that the next message 208 at step 1006 is from a module 101 with a module identity 110.

At step 1007, server 105 can send a second response 209 that includes the module instruction 502, where response 209 can be sent to a module 101 with module identity 110, and response 209 can be sent in after receiving the next message from step 1006. Note that the second response 209 should preferably be sent before the expiration of a firewall port-binding timeout value 117. The second response 209 could include server encrypted data 504, where the module instruction 502 is included in the server encrypted data 504. Alternatively, module instruction 502 could be sent a plaintext in the second response 209, and in this case the second response 209 can preferably include a server digital signature 506. Although not illustrated in FIG. 10, after sending the second response 209 using a step 1007 illustrated in FIG. 10, the set of servers 105 n (of which a server 105 can be a member) can then also receive a confirmation with a timestamp 604 a from module 101 with module identity 110. The set of servers 105 n could then send the timestamp 604 a and module identity 110 to an application server 171 that originated the module instruction 502, thereby informing the application server 171 when the module 101 executed the module instruction 502. Other possibilities exist as well to those of ordinary skill in the art without departing from the scope of the present invention.

FIG. 11

FIG. 11 is a flow chart illustrating exemplary steps for a set of servers to communicate with a module and an application server, in accordance with exemplary embodiments. The exemplary steps illustrated in FIG. 11 could be implemented in either a collection of servers 105 (such as, but not limited to, the two servers 105 illustrated in FIG. 1h ), where the collection of servers comprise a set of servers 105 n. Or, a set of servers can comprise a single server 105 with only one member in the set of servers 105 n. In an exemplary embodiment, a set of servers 105 n could derive the set of server's own server public key 114 and server private key 105 c using a set of cryptographic algorithms 141, a random number generator 128, and a set of cryptographic parameters 126. The set of servers 105 n could use steps similar to step 515 for a module 101 in order to derive one or more server private keys 105 c. According to an exemplary preferred embodiment, a set of servers 105 n can use a plurality of public and private key pairs in order to efficiently and securely communicate through systems such as, but not limited to, those illustrated in system 100, system 199, system 700, system 800, system 1200, and/or system 1300.

A server public key 114 could be recorded in the form of a certificate 122 an optionally signed by a certificate authority 118, and the certificate 122 may also optionally include a set of cryptographic parameters 126 associated with a server public key 114. In an embodiment, a certificate 122 can include a subset of the set of cryptographic parameters 126 associated with the server public key 114, and other members of the set outside the subset can be sent to a module 101 in a server encrypted data 503. In one embodiment, a server public key 114 is kept confidential and not shared with other entities besides a set of modules 101 and/or application server 171. In an exemplary embodiment, the server public key 114 is only transmitted to the set of modules 101 within a server encrypted data 503, in order to increase the security of a system contemplated herein. Different pairs of keys within a plurality of public and private key pairs for a set of servers 105 n can utilize different sets of cryptographic parameters 126. An exemplary use for a set of servers 105 n using different pairs of server public key 114 and server private key 105 c with different parameters 126 is illustrated in FIG. 11, and other possibilities for the use of multiple pairs of public and private keys are possible as well without departing from the scope of the present invention.

At step 1101, in an exemplary embodiment a set of servers 105 n can establish a secure connection with at least one application server 171 using a first server private key 105 c and a first set of cryptographic parameters 126. The secure connection in step 1101 could be established through a secure connection setup 801 illustrated in FIG. 8. The first set of cryptographic parameters 126 could specify multiple values across a set of algorithms comprising (i) asymmetric ciphering algorithms 141 a, (ii) symmetric ciphering 141 b algorithms, (iii) secure hash algorithms 141 c, (iv) digital signature algorithms 141 d, (v) key pair generation algorithms 141 e, and/or (vi) a key derivation function 141 f. The first server private key 105 c could be utilized at step 1101 by any of (i) generating a server digital signature 506 that is sent to an application server 171, (ii) receiving a symmetric key 127 for the secure connection, where the symmetric key 127 is decrypted by a set of servers 105 n using the first server private key 105 c, (iii) input into a key derivation function 141 f including using ECIES with the first server private key 105 c to obtain a derived shared secret key 129 b, and (iv) the first server private key 105 c is used to process a first server public key 114, and the first server public key 114 is used to establish the secure connection. Other possibilities exist as well for values or settings specified in a set of cryptographic parameters 126 without departing from the scope of the present invention.

At step 1102, in an exemplary embodiment the set of servers 105 n can receive a first message 208 that includes a module identity 110. The first message 208 could include a server instruction 414, a module encrypted data 403, and/or a module digital signature 405. In an exemplary embodiment, server 105 can receive other messages 208 and module public keys 111 both before and after steps 1101 and step 1102, as well as other steps contemplated herein. In other words, the various messages and responses illustrated in FIG. 11 can comprise subsets of all messages and responses, such that the subsets comprise illustrated embodiments of the present invention. Note that step 1102 could take place before or after steps 1101 and 1103. Although not illustrated in FIG. 11, a set of servers 105 n could also receive can receive over time a series of module public keys 111 associated with module 101 including the module identity 110. Each member of the series of module public keys 111 could be received in a message 208 that could also include a module public key identity 111 a in order to track the module public keys 111 in the series. A set of servers 105 n could receive the series of module public keys 111 associated with module 101 including the module identity 110 using a step 1004 depicted and described in connection with FIG. 10 above.

At step 1103, a set of servers 105 n can verify a module digital signature 405 with module identity 110 using a first module public key 111. The first module public key 111 could be received and recorded by a set of servers 105 n before or after step 1101, including receiving the first module public key 111 with a module identity 110 from module 101 in a message 208. Note that the module digital signature 405 does not need to be received in the message 208 received at step 1102, and module digital signature 405 could be received in a different message 208. In an exemplary embodiment, the common feature of steps 1102 and steps 1103 can comprise that a set of servers 105 n performs the action, and a module 101 with a module identity 110 submitted the data illustrated in order for a set of servers 105 n to perform the actions described in steps 1102 and 1103.

At step 1104, in an exemplary embodiment the set of servers 105 n can send a first response 209 that includes server digital signature 506, where server digital signature 506 is processed using a second server private key 105 c, and the second server private key 105 c can be different than the first server private key 105 c used in step 1101. As exemplary embodiments, (i) the first server private key 105 c from a step 1101 could be an RSA-based key such as, but not limited to, a private key associated with an exemplary RSA-based public key depicted and described in connection with FIG. 1g of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/039,401, filed Sep. 27, 2013 in the name of John Nix, and (ii) the second server private key 105 c from a step 1104 could be an ECC-based key such as, but not limited to, a private key associated with an exemplary ECC-based public key depicted and described in connection with FIG. 1h of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/039,401, filed Sep. 27, 2013 in the name of John Nix. Note that the second server private key 105 c can also be associated with a second set of cryptographic parameters 126 that are different or not equal to a first set of cryptographic parameters 126 that are associated with the first server private key 105 c used in a step 1101. The second set of cryptographic parameters 126 could be used by a key pair generation algorithms 141 e to process or derive the second server private key 105 c. Also note that both the first server private key 105 c used in step 1101 and the second server private key 105 c used in step 1104 can each be associated with a different random number 128 a, where the different random numbers 128 a could also each be used by a key pair generation algorithms 141 e to process or derive the first server private key 105 c and the second server private key 105 c, respectively.

At step 1105, in exemplary embodiments the set of servers 105 n can receive a second message 208 that includes a module identity 110. The message 208 could include a server instruction 414, a module encrypted data 403, and/or a module digital signature 405. At step 1106, the set of servers 105 n can send a second response 209 with a set of cryptographic parameters 126, where module 101 can use the set of cryptographic parameters 126 to derive a second module public key 111 and a corresponding module private key 112, potentially by using a step 515. According to an exemplary embodiment, the set of cryptographic parameters 126 sent by a set of servers 105 n in a step 1106 could be included in a server encrypted data 504. Security of a system 100 and other systems herein can be increased by encrypting a set of cryptographic parameters 126 sent to a module 101. In an exemplary embodiment, the set of cryptographic parameters 126 sent in a step 1106 can include at least one of (i) the name or value for a symmetric ciphering algorithm 141 b, (ii) parameters or values for a module random seed file 139, (iii) the name or value for an asymmetric ciphering algorithm 141 a, (iv) the name or value for a digital signature algorithm 141 d, (iv) a value for a key pair generation algorithm, (v) a name or value for an elliptic curve defining equation, and/or (vi) a value for a key derivation function 141 f. Module 101 could use the set of cryptographic parameters 126 sent in a step 1106 with a key pair generation algorithms 141 e and a random number generator 128 to derive the second module public key 111. Module 101 could use a step 515 to derive the second module public key 111 and a corresponding module private key 112.

At step 1107, in an exemplary embodiment a set of servers 105 n can receive (i) the second module public key 111 and a module identity 110, and (ii) verify the second module public key 111 using the first module public key 111 received in a step 1103. In an exemplary embodiment, the a set of servers 105 n can use the first module public key 111 to verify the received second module public key 111 using at least one of several sub-steps. The sub-steps at step 1107 to verify the second module public key 111 using the first module public key 111 could comprise any of (i) receiving the second module public key 111 and a module identity 110 with a module encrypted data 403 that uses a symmetric ciphering algorithm 141 b, where the symmetric key 127 for encrypting and decrypting the module encrypted data 403 at step 1107 could previously be communicated before step 1107 using the first module public key 111 (such as a server 105 in the set of servers 105 n sending the symmetric key 127 to module 101 in a server encrypted data 504, where the server encrypted data 504 was ciphered with an asymmetric ciphering algorithm 141 a and the first module public key 111), (ii) receiving the second module public key 111 and module identity 110 with a module digital signature 405 where the module digital signature 405 is verified by the set of servers 105 n using the first module public key 111 (and module 101 could process the module digital signature 405 with the module private key 112 for the first module public key 111 used in a step 1103), and/or (iii) using a derived shared secret key 129 b with a message digest authentication for verifying a received message 208 with the second module public key 111 at step 1107, where the derived shared secret key 129 b was processed using a key derivation function 141 f and the first module public key 111. Other possibilities exist as well without departing from the scope of the present invention for using the first module public key 111 from a step 1103 to verify the second module public key 111 at a step 1107.

At step 1108, in exemplary embodiments a set of servers 105 n can decrypt a module encrypted data 403 using the verified second module public key 111, where the second module public key 111 was verified in a previous step 1107. The module encrypted data 403 be received in a message 208 and could include a server instruction 414, sensor data 604 b, a security token 410, a timestamp 604 a, and/or other data. The set of servers 105 n can decrypt the module encrypted data 403 in a received message 208 at step 1108 using the second module public key 111. In one embodiment, the module encrypted data 403 in step 1108 could be ciphered with a symmetric key 127, where the symmetric key 127 was received in a prior module encrypted data 403 before step 1108 and the symmetric key 127 in the prior module encrypted data 403 before step 1108 could be (i) ciphered using an asymmetric ciphering algorithm 141 a and the second module public key 111, or (ii) ciphered using a symmetric ciphering algorithm 141 b and a derived shared secret key 129 b, where the derived shared secret key 129 b was derived using the second module public key 111 and a key derivation function 141 f. The symmetric key 127 received in a prior module encrypted data 403 before step 1108 with a module identity 110 could be recorded in a shared module database 105 k. A set of servers 105 n, including one member of the set of servers 105 n, could access the shared module database 105 k in order to obtain or read the symmetric key 127. In another embodiment, the prior module encrypted data 403 received prior to step 1108 with the symmetric key 127 could be ciphered with a different key that was communicated using the second module public key 111. Other possibilities exist as well without departing from the scope of the present invention for a set of servers 105 n to use the second module public key 111 to decrypt a module encrypted data 403 in a step 1108.

At step 1109, a set of servers 105 n can send sensor data 604 b to an application server 171 and/or application 171 i using the first server private key 105 c. The sensor data 604 b could be received in a module encrypted data 403, such as but not limited to sensor data 604 b that could be received in a module encrypted data 403 at step 1108. The sensor data 604 b could be sent to application server 171 and/or application 171 i using a secure connection data transfer 802, where the secure connection data transfer 802 was established via a secure connection data setup 801, and the secure connection data setup 801 could use the first server private key 105 c at step 1101. A secure connection data transfer 802 using a first server private key 105 c is depicted and described in connection with FIG. 8. In this manner, (i) a set of servers 105 n can use a first server private key 105 c, with an associated set of cryptographic parameters 126, to communicate with an application server 171 and/or application 171 i, and (ii) a set of servers 105 n can use a second server private key 105 c, with a different associated set of cryptographic parameters 126, to communicate with a module 101. The first and second server private keys 105 c, could each use a set of cryptographic parameters 126 that are selected in order to optimize or enhance a desired level of security and efficiency for communicating (i) with another server for the first server private key 105 c and (ii) with a set of modules 101 for the second server private key 105 c.

FIG. 12

FIG. 12 is a simplified message flow diagram illustrating an exemplary system with exemplary data transferred between a module and an application using a server, in accordance with exemplary embodiments. System 1200 can include an application server 171, a server 105, and a module 101. Although a single application server 171, server 105, and module 101 are illustrated in FIG. 12, a system 1200 could include a plurality of any of these elements. Application server 171 can include application 171 i and utilize IP:port 702 for communicating with server 105. Although not illustrated in FIG. 12, application server 171 could also communicate with other servers or nodes on the Internet, including a user 183 via a web portal 171 j illustrated in FIG. 1d , or an enterprise resource planning (ERP) system (not shown). The nodes illustrated in FIG. 12 could communicate using Internet protocols such as, but not limited to, TCP and/or UDP, and the network between server 105 and application server 171 could be either via the public Internet 107 or a private intranet or a VPN layered on top of the public Internet 107. Other possibilities exist as well, and according to an exemplary embodiment, application server 171 and server 105 can be connected via a LAN, such that packets between the two do not route over the public Internet 107. Sending data between two nodes on a LAN can also be considered using a secure connection data transfer 802.

Server 105 can include a module controller 105 x, a shared secret key 510, and a module identity 110, in addition to the other components and values shown for a server 105 illustrated in FIG. 1f and FIG. 1c , including a module database 105 k, and one or more server private keys 105 c. Shared secret key 510 is depicted and described in connection with FIG. 5b , and can also comprise a pre-shared secret key 129 a in one embodiment where server 105 receives a module public key 111 from module 101 for the first time (i.e. before server 105 sends or receives encrypted data with module 101). As contemplated herein, a server 105 may also comprise a set of servers 105 n, such that the set of servers 105 n can perform the actions depicted and described for a server 105 illustrated in FIG. 12 and other Figures. Module identity 110 can comprise an identity for module 101, and is also depicted and described in connection with FIG. 1e and elsewhere herein. Server 105 can use IP:port number 901 for communicating with application server 171 and IP:port number 207 for communicating with module 101 and other modules. Note that server 105 could also use multiple IP:port numbers 901 and 207 in a system 1200, such as, but not limited to, a first IP:port number 901 to communicate with a first application server 171 and/or application 171 i, a second IP:port number 901 to communicate with a second application server 171, a first IP:port number 207 to communicate with a first set of modules 101, a second IP:port number 207 to communicate with a second set of modules 101, etc. The IP addresses and port numbers within an IP:port number 901 and 207 can also change over time.

Module controller 105 x is depicted and described in connection with FIG. 1c , FIG. 8, FIG. 9, and elsewhere herein. Module controller 105 x can transmit, send, and receive packets for server 105 using IP:port number 207. Although a single module controller 105 x and server 105 are illustrated in FIG. 12, a server 105 could include multiple module controllers 105 x that are distributed, and server 105 could also be distributed such that different sub-servers 105 w perform the function of server 105 in an exemplary embodiment, and the sub-servers 105 w could also include the module controller 105 x. Module 101 in system 1200 can comprise a module 101 as depicted and described in connection with FIG. 1a , FIG. 1b , FIG. 1d , FIG. 2, and elsewhere herein. Module 101 can include a module identity 110 and a shared secret key 510 and utilize an IP:port number 204 for sending and receiving data with server 105. IP:port number 204 can also change over time, such that module 101 uses either a different IP address 202 or port number 203 when (i) sending one message 208 or a series of message 208 to (ii) sending the next message 208 or series of messages 208. According to an exemplary embodiment, module 101 can connect with multiple different networks 102 over time and each network 102 may provide a different IP address 202 to module 101. Alternatively, the same network 102 may provide a different IP address 202 for module 101 at different times.

In an exemplary embodiment, module 101 can use a different IP address 202 between either periods of sleep or when a DHCP lease expires, and other possibilities exist as well. As in other Figures in the present invention, IP addresses illustrated in FIG. 12 may comprise either IPv4 or IPv6 addresses. System 1200 may include a firewall 104, which may operate between module 101 and server 105, and firewall 104 can provide NAT routing functionality, such that IP address 210 illustrated in FIG. 12 is different than IP address 202 (in FIG. 2), and firewall 104 may translate ports as well. Note that firewall 104 may also be a symmetric firewall 104 illustrated in FIG. 9, such that addresses and ports are not translated by firewall 104, but in this case IP:port 204 may change over time in exemplary embodiments (such as, but not limited to, from module 101 using different networks 102, or acquiring different IP addresses 202 between periods of sleep, etc.). The IP address 210 and port number 605 illustrated in FIG. 12 for firewall 12 can comprise the IP address and port number on the external interface of firewall 104, such that packets routed to/from the Internet 107 with module 101 could use IP address 202 and port number 605 as a source/destination IP:port number, respectively.

Prior to step 1201, module 101 may optionally derive a module public key 111 and a module private key 112 using a step 515, as depicted and described in connection with FIG. 5b . Note that the internal derivation of module public key 111 and module private key 112 using a step 515 are not required to use the other components and steps illustrated in a system 1200. A system 1200 (or system 1300 below in FIG. 13) can also be used in an alternative embodiment where module private key 111 is obtained by other means than internal derivation using a key pair generation algorithm 141 e, such as loading module private key 112 into a nonvolatile memory 101 c or 101 w upon manufacturing, distribution, or installation or a module 101 or at other times. However, in an exemplary embodiment, a system 1200 illustrated in FIG. 12 can be useful for secure and efficient communication between a module 101, server 105, and application server 171 when module 101 also derives the module private key 112 and module public key 111, potentially by using a step 515. The derivation of keys does not need to use and/or be associated with IP:port 204, and step 515 is illustrated in FIGS. 12 and 13 are shown for an exemplary sequence of timing and location of message flows, such that key derivation using a step 515 can take place before a step 1201.

At step 1201, in an exemplary embodiment server 105 can use a module controller 105 x to receive a first message 208 that includes module public key 111. The first message 208 can also include a module identity 110, or other identifying information such that server 105 can determine the first message 208 with module public key 111 is associated with module identity 110. The first message 208 can also preferably include a module public key identity 111 a associated with the module public key 111. Although not illustrated in FIG. 12, at step 1201 module controller 105 x can also receive a set of cryptographic parameters 126 associated with module public key 111, such as, but not limited to, a value for an elliptic curve defining equation, a RSA modulus, a time-to-live value or expiration date, etc. As received by server 105 (i.e. after traversing firewall 104), the source IP address and source port number in message 208 can comprise IP address 210 and port number 605, which can be different than IP:port number 204 due to network address translation by a firewall 104. Module controller 105 x can use IP:port number 207 to receive the first message 208, wherein IP:port number 207 can comprise a destination address in a packet header of the first message 208 as illustrated in FIG. 6a . Although depicted in FIG. 12 as a “first message” 208, module 101 may have previously sent messages 208 to server 105, and the “first message” 208 can comprise the first message 208 received within the series or sequence of packets illustrated in FIG. 12. Other messages 208 may potentially flow before and/or after a “first message” 208. This terminology of “first message”, “second response”, “second public key”, etc. contemplated in various Figures herein may refer to the “first message”, “second response”, “second public key”, “first set of parameters”, etc. described in the illustrated flows within each Figures. Other messages, responses, keys, and parameters may be communicated before and/or after a depicted “first message”, “second response”, “second public key”, etc. and the depicted elements can comprise a subset of other messages, responses, keys, etc. that may also flow in addition to the elements illustrated.

Although server 105 is illustrated as receiving module public key 111 in FIG. 12 using a module controller 105 x, a first sub-server 105 w could receive module public key 111, and a different sub-server 105 w or server 105 using a different module controller 105 x could send and/or receive subsequent messages and responses illustrated in FIG. 12. Thus, a system 1200 could use a plurality of module controllers 105 x in a coordinated manner to operate as a single module controller 105 x illustrated in FIG. 12 and FIG. 13. In an exemplary embodiment, server 105 can receive module public key 111 at a step 1201 due to any of (i) module 101 communicating with server 105 for the first time, (ii) module 101 deriving a new module public key such as using step 515 in FIG. 5b , or (iii) an end user, technician, or distributor loading a new module public key 111 (with a module private key 112) into module 101, and other possibilities for reasons for receiving module public key 111 exist as well without departing from the scope of the present invention. In an exemplary embodiment, server 105 has already securely communicated with module 101 using a different or prior module public key 111 (not shown, and also possibly with a different set of parameters 126) before receiving the module public key 111 illustrated in FIG. 12, and the module public key 111 at step 1201 can represent a new module public key 111 to be used with subsequent communications. In an exemplary embodiment, the module public key 111 received at step 1201 in FIG. 12 comprises an exemplary message 208 illustrated in FIG. 6b . Server 105 could also receive the new module public key 111 in FIG. 12 by previously sending a module instruction 502 for module 101 to derive a new module public key 111 and module private key 112 using a set of parameters 126, and other possibilities exist as well.

At step 1202 in exemplary embodiments module controller 105 x and/or server 105 can verify or authenticate module public key 111, where the received data that includes module public key 111 also includes a received module identity 110. Module controller 105 x and/or server 105 could authenticate and/or verify module public key 111 is associated with the recorded module identity 110 using a step 517 depicted and described in connection with FIG. 5b , including using a shared secret key 510. At step 1202, module controller 105 x can also use a set of cryptographic parameters 126 and a set of cryptographic algorithms 141 to verify or authenticate module public key 111 at step 1202. In one exemplary embodiment, step 1202 could use a message digest authentication and the shared secret key 510 to verify a response from module 101 with the message digest. At step 1202, module controller 105 x and/or server 105 can take other actions besides message digest using the shared secret key 510 to determine if module 101 has the shared secret key 510. Upon determination that module 101 has the shared secret key 510 (i.e. determining the received module public key 111 is associated with the recorded module identity 110 via the shared secret key 510) then module public key 111 with the received module identity 110 can be authenticated and/or verified. In one exemplary embodiment module controller 105 x and/or server 105 could use shared secret key 510 in processing a symmetric key 127, such that if server 105 can decrypt data sent with module public key 111 and a symmetric ciphering algorithm 141 b, then server 105 can determine that module 101 has the shared secret key 510. Shared secret key 510 could also be used by module 101 in sending a secure hash signature with the module public key 111 at step 1201 (where shared secret key 510 is used by module 101 to generate the secure hash signature), and server 105 could verify the received secure hash signature with the shared secret key 510 and a secure hash algorithms 141 c at step 1202.

Other possibilities exist as well for authenticating and/or verifying module public key 111 at step 1202, and the use of a shared secret key 510 is not required in order to authenticate and/or verify that module public key 111 is associated with a recorded module identity 110 at a step 1202. A set of cryptographic parameters 126 that were received with module 101 in step 1201 could also specify the actions or processes that module controller 105 x and/or server 105 can use to authenticate and/or verify module public key 111 at step 1202. In an exemplary embodiment, server 105 can authenticate and/or verify module public key 111 is associated with module identity 110 using a certificate 122 and a signature from a certificate authority 118, such as using a step 412 depicted and described in connection with FIG. 4. In this embodiment with a certificate authority 118 or another server performing steps 1201 and 1202, the certificate authority 118 or another server may operate in conjunction with server 105 and/or module controller 105 x and perform an authentication and/or verification of module public key 111. In another exemplary embodiment, server 105 and/or M2M service provider 108 (with potentially a different server than the server 105 illustrated in FIG. 12) may have communicated with module 101 prior to receiving module public key 111 at step 1201, and in this case server 105 could use a different key than shared secret key 510 to authenticate and/or verify at step 1201 module public key 111 illustrated in FIG. 12 is properly associated with module identity 110, such as using the different key (not shown) with a message digest, module digital signature 405, symmetric ciphering algorithm 141 b, and/or secure hash algorithms 141 c using data received with module public key 111. A set of parameters 126 received with module public key 111 at step 1201 could specify that module controller 105 x use the different key to authenticate and/or verify module public key 111 at step 1202. Servers for a certificate authority 118, M2M service provider 108, module provider 109, and/or server 105 connected via a network can also operate or function as a set of servers 105 n.

In another embodiment, server 105 and/or M2M service provider 108 may previously have communicated a symmetric key 127 with module 101, and the symmetric key 127 could be used to authenticate and/or verify module public key 111 at step 1202. Server 105 could receive the symmetric key 127 from (i) the M2M service provider 108, or (ii) module 101 before step 1201 (in a previous state where module 101 was authenticated with server 105). Module public key 111 at step 1201 and/or other data could be sent in a module encrypted data 403 using the symmetric key 127, and decrypting the module public key 111 from a step 1201 with the symmetric key 127 can determine that module public key 111 is authenticated and/or verified at a step 1202.

In another embodiment, server 105 could have received a prior module public key 111 (possibly from M2M service provider 108 or another authenticated and/or verified source) before the received module public key 111 from step 1201 illustrated in FIG. 12, and server 105 and/or module controller 105 x could use the prior module public key 111 and a module digital signature 405 (processing using a prior module private key 112) sent with the module public key 111 at step 1201 illustrated in FIG. 12 to determine that the module public key 111 is authenticated and/or verified at a step 1202. In accordance with exemplary embodiments, step 1202 can authenticate and/or verify that received module public key 111 is properly associated with the module identity 110 recorded in server 105 in order to securely communicate with module 101 at subsequent steps illustrated in FIG. 12, thereby securing a system 1200. Without proper authentication and/or verification that module public key 111 is properly associated with a recorded module identity 110 at step 1202 by using the exemplary embodiments described herein, a system 1200 may be vulnerable to an imposter, hackers, or fraudulent submissions of module public key 111 and/or subsequent communication with the wrong (or fraudulent) module 101 in subsequent communications.

At step 1202 a, an application interface 105 i can send the received and verified module public key 111 to application server 171 and/or application server 171 i via a secure connection data transfer 802 and an application message 701. The application message 701 can also include the module identity 110, a module public key identity 111 a, and a set of cryptographic parameters 126, and the module identity 110, the module public key identity 111 a, and the set of cryptographic parameters 126 could be also received in the message 208 at step 1201. Although not illustrated in FIG. 12, application server 171 and/or application 171 i could (i) record the data received in step 1202 a and also (ii) send values received in application message 701 at step 1202 a to a second server 105, such as a second server 105 (not shown in FIG. 12) illustrated in FIG. 1h using a second secure connection data transfer 802. In this manner, a second server 105 can record the module identity 110, the verified module public key 111, the module public key identity 111 a, and the set of cryptographic parameters 126 associated with module public key 111 in a module database 105 k associated with the second server 105.

In another embodiment, at step 1202 a, server 105 could record the module identity 110, the verified module public key 111, the module public key identity 111 a, and the set of cryptographic parameters 126 associated with module public key 111 in a shared module database 105 k (such as the module database 105 k illustrated in FIG. 1h ), and a second server 105 could have access to the data by querying the shared module database 105 k. A shared module database 105 k is also illustrated in FIG. 1h . In an embodiment where server 105 accesses a shared module database 105 k, at step 1202 a the module public key 111 and related data (such as, but not limited to, module identity 110), could be sent to the shared module database 105 k via the message shown in step 1202 a instead of sending the message to application server 171. In this case by using a shared module database 105 k, the message at step 1202 a could comprise or trigger an “insert” command or message to shared module database 105 k, where the insert command could include (i) a table name, (ii) the received and verified module public key 111, (iii) the module identity 110, (iv) a set of cryptographic parameters for module 101, and (v) a module public key identity 111 a. In this manner with exemplary embodiments, by sharing module database 105 k with multiple servers 105, communication with module 101 and a plurality of servers 105 can be more efficient, since each server 105 can access data such as a previously recorded and verified module public key 111, module identity 110, module public key identity 111 a, and set of cryptographic parameters 126 associated with each module 101. By reducing the transmission of messages between a module 101 and different servers 105 over the lifetime of module 101, a system can be simultaneously more secure and more efficient.

By a second server 105 receiving the values from application server 171 and/or application 171 i, the second server 105 can also record that module 101 with the module public key 111 (received in step 1201 shown in FIG. 12) and module identity 110 has been verified. In addition, although server 105 is illustrated as sending the module public key 111 to application server 171 in FIG. 12 at step 1202 a, server 105 could alternatively send the module public key 111, the module identity 110, a module public key identity 111 a, and a set of cryptographic parameters 126 associated with module 101 directly to a second server 105, such as, but not limited to, server B 105 depicted and described in connection with FIG. 1h . Server 105 could send the module public key 111, the module identity 110, a module public key identity 111 a, and a set of cryptographic parameters 126 associated with module 101 to the second server B 105 illustrated in FIG. 1h using a secure connection data transfer 802. In another embodiment, a second server B 105 illustrated in FIG. 1h could access the verified module public key 111 from steps 1201 and 1202 by accessing a module database 105 k where server 105 had recorded the module public key 111, the module identity 110, a module public key identity 111 a, and a set of cryptographic parameters 126 associated with module 101.

At step 1203, module controller 105 x can send a server digital signature 506 with a server identity 206, and server digital signature 506 could be processed as described in FIG. 5a . In an exemplary embodiment, module controller 105 x and/or server 105 could use (i) a first server private key 105 c, (ii) a set of cryptographic parameters 126, and (iii) a digital signature algorithm 141 d to process and/or create server digital signature 506. Module controller 105 x can use IP:port number 207 for sending server digital signature 506. In an exemplary embodiment, a second server private key 105 c using a different set of cryptographic parameters 126 could be used with secure connection setup 801 to application 171 i. In one embodiment, first server private key 105 c can use ECC algorithms 154 and the second server private key 105 c can use RSA algorithms 153, and the selection of ECC algorithms 154 or RSA algorithms 153 can be specified in a set of cryptographic parameters 126, although other possibilities exist as well. In another embodiment, a single server private key 105 c (possibly with a single set of cryptographic parameters 126) can be used for both server digital signature 506 and secure connection setup 801. Server digital signature 506 could be sent within a response 209, and although not illustrated in FIG. 12, server digital signature 506 could be associated with or sent with a packet that includes a symmetric key 127 for use by module 101. A set of parameters 126 used with processing server digital signature 506 can be sent by module controller 105 x before, with, or after step 1203.

Although not illustrated in FIG. 12, module controller 105 x could also send server encrypted data 504 to module 101 at step 1203, where the server encrypted data 504 can include exemplary values such as, but not limited to, an actuator instruction 706, a module instruction 502, a security token 401, additional cryptographic parameters 126, a symmetric key 127, or an acknowledgement that a message 208 has been received. In accordance with a preferred exemplary embodiment, module controller 105 x sends a server digital signature 506 with server identity 206 to module 101 in a step 1203 upon the successful authentication and/or verification of module public key 111 received in step 1202 above. Module 101 can use the server digital signature 506, server public key 114, a set of parameters 126, and a digital signature algorithm 141 d to verify the identity of server 105 used in FIG. 12. Server digital signature 506 may also be sent with or as a signal that the module public key 111 was properly received in a step 1201 and/or authenticated or verified at a step 1202. In one embodiment, the set of parameters 126 can specify (i) a secure hash algorithm 141 c to use with a digital signature algorithm 141 d (such as, but not limited to, either SHA-256, SHA-3, etc.), and (ii) additional details for processing a secure hash algorithm 141 c used with a digital signature algorithm 141 d such as the format or order of strings or values input into a secure hash algorithm 141 c. In another embodiment, digital signature algorithms 141 d can include logic for the format, order, strings or values, and encoding to use for processing a digital signature including a server digital signature 506 and/or a module digital signature 405. In other words, a set of parameters 126 and/or digital signature algorithms 141 d can include settings such that a server 105 and module 101 can calculate, derive, or process the same digital signature as the other node.

At step 1204, a module controller 105 x can receive a module digital signature 405. Module controller 105 x can use an IP:port number 207 to receive the module digital signature 405. Although not illustrated in FIG. 12, module controller 105 x can receive module digital signature 405 with a module identity 110. In addition, although the receipt of module digital signature 405 is depicted as after the sending of server digital signature 506, module digital signature 405 could be received before the sending of server digital signature 506 in exemplary embodiments. Processing a module digital signature 405 is also depicted and described in connection with FIG. 4 above and elsewhere herein. Module digital signature 405 could be received in a message 208, which could be formatted with the exemplary format for a message 208 in illustrated in FIG. 6a , and other possibilities exist as well.

Module digital signature 405 received in step 1204 can also include a symmetric key 127, and symmetric key 127 could be ciphered using an asymmetric ciphering algorithm 141 a, where a module 101 used a server public key 114 in order to encrypt the symmetric key 127. Symmetric key 127 could be used with a symmetric ciphering algorithm 141 b and a set of parameters 126 at subsequent (i) step 1207 to decrypt data within a second message 208 and/or (ii) step 1208 to encrypt data within a response 209. The use of a symmetric key 127 with a set of parameters 126 is depicted and described in connection with FIG. 1e , FIG. 3, FIG. 4, and FIG. 5a , and elsewhere herein. In an exemplary embodiment, the receipt of module digital signature 405 at step 1204 can be omitted, and the verification of messages or packets from module 101 can be processed with other means, such as using the shared secret key 510. However, over time and with a change of the use of IP addresses such as, but not limited to, changing source IP:port number 210:605, and possibly using different sub-servers to receive messages from module 101, the periodic transmission of a module digital signature 405 may be preferred.

At step 1205, module controller 105 x can verify the module digital signature 405 for module identity 110 received in step 1204 using the module public key 111 (i) received in step 1201 and (ii) authenticated in step 1202. At step 1205, module controller 105 x can use a set of parameters 126, the module public key 111 received in step 1201, digital signature algorithms 141 d, secure hash algorithms 141 c, and module identity 110 in order to verify module digital signature 405. Although not illustrated in FIG. 12, after step 1205, module controller 105 x can then follow the sequence of steps illustrated in FIG. 3 to process additional messages 208 and responses 209 from/to module 101, until application message 701 with module instruction 502 is received at step 1206 below. The symmetric key 127 received in step 1204 with a module digital signature 405 verified in a step 1205 could be used to receive module encrypted data 403 and send server encrypted data 504 after step 1205.

At step 1205 a, after verifying the module digital signature 405 received in step 1204 and verified in step 1205, an application interface 105 i can send a symmetric key 127 for use with module 101 to application server 171 and/or application server 171 i via a secure connection data transfer 802 and an application message 701. The symmetric key 127 sent in application message 701 could be received in step 1204, or the symmetric key 127 could be processed or generated by server 105 and sent to module 101 in step 1203. The application message 701 at step 1205 a can also include the module identity 110. Although not illustrated in FIG. 12, application server 171 and/or application 171 i could record the data received in step 1205 a and also send values received in application message 701 at step 1205 a to a second server 105, such as a second server 105 (not shown in FIG. 12) illustrated in FIG. 1h using a second secure connection data transfer 802. In this manner, a second server 105 can record include the module identity 110 and the symmetric key 127 with a module database 105 k for the second server 105. In another embodiment, at step 1205 a, server 105 could record the received symmetric key 127 and module identity 110, plus optionally related additional information, in a shared module database 105 k. A second server 105, such as server B 105 illustrated in FIG. 1h , could access the symmetric key 127 and module identity 110 via the shared module database 105 k.

By a second server 105 receiving the symmetric key 127 and module identity 110 from either (i) application server 171 or (ii) a shared module database 105 k, the second server 105 can communicate with module 101 using module identity 110 and the symmetric key 127 without the second server previously conducting the steps 1201 through 1204. In this manner according to a preferred exemplary embodiment, a system 100 can be made more efficient, since a second server 105 (such as the second server 105 illustrated as “Server B” in FIG. 1h ) can use the symmetric key 127 received from application server 171 or shared module database 105 k to communicate with module 101 without requiring sending or receiving additional packets in order to establish or communicate a symmetric key 127. In addition, although server 105 is illustrated as sending the symmetric key 127 to application server 171 in FIG. 12, server 105 could alternatively send the symmetric key 127 directly to a second server 105, such as server B 105 depicted and described in connection with FIG. 1h . Server 105 could send the symmetric key 127 and module identity 110 to the second server B 105 illustrated in FIG. 1h using a secure connection data transfer 802. Server 105 could use a step 1205 a to send the symmetric key 127 and module identity 110 to a plurality of servers, including and of a plurality of application servers 171, other servers 105, and a one or more shared module databases 105 k.

At step 1206, in an exemplary embodiment server 105 can receive an application message 701 that includes a module instruction 502. In exemplary embodiments, application message 701 received also includes a module identity 110 in order to specify which module 101 from a plurality of modules 101 that module instruction 502 is intended as the ultimate recipient. The application message 701 could be received through secure connection data transfer 802, which could be established using secure connection setup 801. Application interface 105 x can use IP:port number 901 to receive application message 701, where application message 701 includes IP:port number 702 as a source IP:port number in the packet header of application message 701, as illustrated in FIG. 7. Secure connection data transfer 802 and secure connection setup 801 are depicted and described in connection with FIG. 8 above. As contemplated herein, the term “secure connection” can refer to either secure connection data transfer 802 or secure connection setup 801. An application message 701 is depicted and described in connection with FIG. 7 through FIG. 9. A module instruction 502 within application message 701 can include an instruction, command, or data for module 101, possibly including any of the exemplary module instructions 502 depicted and described in connection with FIG. 7 for an exemplary module instruction 502 in an application message 701. As illustrated in FIG. 12, application message 701 received in step 1206 can be received after a first message 208 and before a second message 208.

In the exemplary embodiment of system 199 illustrated in FIG. 1h , the use of a server 105 for routing module instruction between (i) an application 171 i and/or application server 171 and (ii) a module 101 may be preferred for many different reasons, including supporting scalability, increasing security, reducing bandwidth, supporting legacy cryptographic algorithms 141 supported on application server 171, and/or increasing efficiency by using two different cryptographic schemes, where one is optimized for communication between modules and servers, and a second is optimized for communication between servers.

In exemplary embodiments, application message 701 from step 1206 can be received when (i) module 101 comprises a sleep or dormant state, (ii) a firewall port binding timeout value 117 associated with firewall 104 has expired, and/or (iii) communication with module 101 is not available for other reasons (such as, but not limited to, out of range of a wireless network, waiting for a battery 105 k to be recharged, etc.) For any of the above cases, outbound packets sent from module controller 105 x would not normally be received by module 101. Consequently, after receiving application message 701 in step 1206, module controller 105 x can begin waiting for a wait interval 703. As illustrated in FIG. 12, application interface 105 i can send application 171 i a second application message 701 upon waiting for a second message 208 from module 101, where the second application message 701 can comprise an application update 704 instruction of “waiting”. Application update 704 instruction of “waiting” can include module identity 110. In this manner, application 171 i can be informed that module controller 105 x and/or server 105 comprise a state of wait interval 703 for the next or second message 208 from module 101. Wait interval 703 can end when the second message 208 is received from module 101 where the second message 208 can include a module identity 110 received in the application message 701 at step 1206. The second message 208 can comprise the next message 208 after server 105 receives the module instruction 502. Module controller 105 x and/or server 105 can stop waiting when the next message 208 is received from module 101, and the next message 208 is illustrated as a second message 208 in FIG. 12.

At step 1207, module controller 105 x can receive a second message 208 from module 101. Module controller 105 x can receive the second message 208 by monitoring an IP:port number 207. IP:port number 207 in step 1207 can be the same value or address as IP:port number 207 in step 1201, or IP:port number 207 in step 1207 could be a different value or address than IP:port number 207 in step 1201. According to exemplary embodiments, over time a specific address and/or numeric value for a port number used in an IP:port number contemplated herein can change. In an exemplary embodiment, the second message 208 includes a source IP address of IP address 210 and a source port number of port number 605. As illustrated in FIG. 12, IP address 210 and port number 605 can comprise an IP address and port number associated with the external interface of a firewall 104, and can represent a source IP:port number in a packet header received in a message 208 as illustrated in FIG. 6a and FIG. 2. In this exemplary embodiment, the numeric values for IP:port number 210:605 received in the second message 208 can be different than the numeric values for IP:port number 210:605 received in the first message 208. IP:port number 210:605 received in the second message 208 can be different than in the first message due to many factors, including (i) module 101 has moved to a different network 102 in step 1207 after server 105 received the first message in step 1201, (ii) firewall 104 has changed a source port number 605 based on logic internal to firewall 104 for allocating, sharing, using, and reusing port numbers with a plurality of connected nodes, and (iii) a network 102 could also change the IP address 202 used by module 101.

Continuing at step 1207, the second message 208 can preferably include a module identity 110, wherein the module identity 110 was previously verified as being associated with module public key 111 in step 1202. Module identity 110 in a second message 208 could comprise string or number with a different value than a module identity 110 received in the first message 208 at step 1201, such as, but not limited to, the module identity 110 in the second message comprising a session identifier associated with module identity 110. In exemplary embodiments, module controller 105 x can process the string or number for module identity 110 received in the second message 208 in order to associate the string or value in a module identity 110 received in the second message 208 at step 1207 with the string or value for a module identity 110 received in the first message 208 at step 1201. As contemplated herein, exemplary embodiments contemplate the use of different strings or values for the same module identity 110. Different strings or values for a first module identity 110 can be separated from different strings or values for a second module identity 110 because (i) the strings or values as a first module identity 110 can be associated with a first physical module 101, including possibly a serial number for the first physical module 101, whereas (ii) the strings or values as a second module identity 110 can be associated with a second physical module 101, including possibly a serial number for the second physical module 101. Although not illustrated in FIG. 12, the second message 208 at a step 1207 could include additional data such as, but not limited to, a module encrypted data 403, a module digital signature 405, and/or a server instruction 414. The server instruction 414 could be sent as plaintext in a body 602 or could be encrypted or obfuscated.

At step 1208, in exemplary embodiments module controller 105 x can send a response 209 to the second message 208, and the response 209 can include the module instruction 502 received at step 1206. The second message 208 and the response 209 can be sent and received as UDP packets or datagrams. In an exemplary embodiment, module controller 105 x uses both (i) IP:port number 207 that received the second message 208 as a source IP:port number in response 209, and (ii) the IP:port number 210:605 received in the second message 208 as a destination IP:port number in response 209. In this manner, response 209 can traverse a firewall 104 in order to be received by module 101. In an exemplary embodiment, module controller 105 x can send response 209 before the expiration of a firewall port-binding timeout value 117, where the start of firewall port-binding timeout value 117 began when message 208 traversed firewall 104. Module instruction 502 in response 209 can be formatted or encoded differently than module instruction 502 received in application message 701 at step 1206. Response 209 could include module instruction 502 within a server encrypted data 504, where server encrypted data 504 can be ciphered using the symmetric key 127 received in step 1204. In an exemplary embodiment, module instruction 502 can be sent as plaintext in response 209, and in this case response 209 can preferably include a server digital signature 506 in order for module 101 to confirm or verify that server 105 and/or module controller 105 x sent module instruction 502.

According to an exemplary embodiment, at step 1209, module controller 105 x can receive a server instruction 414 comprising an acknowledgement with a timestamp 604 a when module 101 properly received and/or executed module instruction 502 from step 1208. Application interface 105 i can send an application update 704 with the module identity 110, where application update 704 can comprise (i) an acknowledgement that module 101 with module identity 110 executed the module instruction 502 received in step 1206, and (ii) a timestamp value 604 a when module 101 properly received and/or executed module instruction 502. In exemplary embodiments, the inclusion of timestamp 604 a can be important or useful for application 171 i to manage or control a plurality of modules 101 via a server 105 or a set of servers 105 n. The timestamp 604 a can be useful because module 101 may utilize sleep and/or dormant states, or possibly having periodic outages or loss of access to Internet 107 and/or network 102. As one example, there could also be an exemplary delay of minutes or longer between module 101's execution of module instruction 502 and when module 101 can send an acknowledgement such as server instruction 414, possibly due to a sleep state or network outage. Additional unknown or uncertain time for application 171 i between sending module instruction 502 at step 1206 the execution of module instruction 502 by module 101 can include the wait interval 703. Consequently, in accordance with a preferred exemplary embodiment, server instruction 414 and application update 704 at step 1209 include a timestamp 604 a that module 101 executed module instruction 502.

Although not illustrated in FIG. 12, server instruction 414 could include additional data such as sensor data 604 b or other data associated with a state of module 101 or a component within module 101 including the state or value for an actuator 101 y. Server instruction 414 could be included in a module encrypted data 403. Application update 704 can include the sensor data 604 b and additional information. In one embodiment, server instruction 414 can be received with a module identity 110 and server instruction 414 with timestamp 604 a can be encrypted in a module encrypted data 403.

FIG. 13

FIG. 13 is a simplified message flow diagram illustrating an exemplary system with exemplary data transferred between a module and an application using a server, in accordance with exemplary embodiments. System 1300 can include an application server 171, a server 105, and a module 101. Although a single application server 171, server 105, and module 101 are illustrated in FIG. 13, a system 1300 could include a plurality of any of these elements. System 1300 illustrated in FIG. 13 can comprise the same components, steps, and message flows as system 1200 illustrated in FIG. 12, with changes to support (i) a polling of a module instruction 502 from application 171 i and/or application server 171 in a step 1302 instead of (ii) receiving module instruction 502 in a step 1206 illustrated in FIG. 12.

Steps 1201 through step 1205 illustrated in FIG. 13 can comprise the same steps 1201 through 1205 depicted and described in connection with FIG. 12. At step 1301, application 171 i can process a module instruction 502 to be sent to a module 101 with a module identity 110. The determination and/or processing of a module instruction 502 could be for any reason application 171 i prefers for a state, value, or setting within a module 101 to change. Module instruction 502 could comprise any of the exemplary module instructions 502 depicted and described in connection with FIG. 7, and other possibilities exist as well. In one exemplary embodiment, at step 1301 application 171 i could determine that a setting for an actuator 101 y should change, such as based on the input from a user 183 or other automated control decisions. Although not illustrated in FIG. 12 above, an application 171 i and/or application server 171 within a system 1200 could also use a step 1301 before sending the application message 701 with module instruction 502 in step 1206, where the module instruction 502 can be processed at a step 1301 in a system 1200 above.

According to an exemplary embodiment, illustrated in FIG. 13, after step 1301 the wait interval 703 illustrated in FIG. 12 can be omitted by not receiving module instruction 502 in an application message at step 1206. Instead, and as illustrated in FIG. 13, module controller 105 x could receive the second message 208 from a step 1207 after receiving the module public key 111 in a step 1201. Upon or after receiving the second message 208 in a step 1207, server 105 and/or application interface 105 i can send application 171 i and/or application server 171 an application message 701 with a polling request at step 1302. In an exemplary embodiment, the polling request could signal that a module 101 in a system 1300 is ready and available to receive the module instruction 502. In an exemplary embodiment, application message 701 in a step 1302 can be sent using application interface 105 i and an IP:port number 901. The application message 701 can optionally be sent using a secure connection data transfer 802. The polling request in application message 701 at step 1302 can be useful since module 101 may use periods of sleep or dormancy, and or periodically not be connected or accessible through a network 102 and/or firewall 104, and in this case module instruction 502 could not be transmitted or sent to module 101 at arbitrary times.

At step 1303, application 171 i can send the module instruction 502 processed above at step 1301, after receiving the first application message 701 with the polling request. Module instruction 502 can be sent from application 171 i to application interface 105 i in a second application message 701 at step 1303 and may also use a secure connection data transfer 802. Application interface 105 i can receive the second application message 701 with the module instruction 502. As illustrated in FIG. 13, module controller 105 x can then use a step 1208 to send the module instruction 502 in a response 209. System 1300 can then also use step 1209 to receive a server instruction 414 with an acknowledgement and a timestamp 604 a, and send an acknowledgement 704 to application 171 i and/or application server 171. In an exemplary embodiment, a step 1209 can be optionally omitted, and timestamp 604 a could be optionally communicated in a separate application message 701 at a later time or within other application messages 701 not depicted in system 1300.

System 1300 illustrated in FIG. 13 may be preferred in a system where a single application 171 i communicates with a server 105. In another embodiment, where multiple application servers 171 communicate with a server 105 or a set of servers 105 n, then a system 1200 may be preferred, where server 105 receives the module instruction without sending an application message 701 with a polling request. One reason is that when multiple application servers 171 communicate with server 105, an application interface 171 i may not know the correct or proper application server 171 in order to send the application message 701 with the polling request at a step 1302 (since potentially many different application servers 171 may be a source of the module instruction 502). Without knowing the proper application server 171 to send the application message 701 with the polling request, server 105 would then need to poll the plurality of application servers 171 each time a second message 208 was received in a step 1207. A server 105 could receive many second messages 208 over time, and polling a plurality of application servers 171 each time a second message 208 was received could significantly increase network traffic and load, and therefore may not be efficient.

According to an exemplary embodiment, application 171 i can operate within server 105, and in this case IP:port 702 and/or IP:port 901 could be a loopback address and port number, which is reserved for the block of IPv4 addresses 127.x.x.x, and a similar loopback port for IPv6 addresses could be utilized as well when an application 171 i operates within server 105.

FIG. 14

FIG. 14 is a graphical illustration of an exemplary system that includes a set of application servers, a set of servers, and a set of modules, in accordance with exemplary embodiments. System 1400 can include multiple application servers 171, multiple servers 105, and a plurality of modules 101. A large, distributed system of thousands or more modules may utilize multiple application servers 171, such as, but not limited to, the multiple application servers 171 associated with one or more enterprises with multiple operating divisions. Or, the application servers 171 in a system 1400 could each be associated with the same enterprise, while separate application servers 171 could be associated with separate divisions. In another embodiment, M2M service provider 108 may support different customers, where some customer may prefer or require the use of a different or segmented application server 171 and/or application 171 i, and in this case an M2M service provider 108 with a plurality of modules 101 and servers 105 may utilize different application servers 171 for different customers. Multiple application servers 171 could comprise a set of application servers 171. Other possibilities exist as well for using a set of application servers, a set of servers, and a set or plurality of modules without departing from the scope of the present invention.

In an embodiment where multiple application servers 171 communicate with multiple servers 105, a combination of steps with system 1200 illustrated in FIG. 12 and steps within system 1300 illustrated in FIG. 13 may be preferred. Before step 1206 in FIG. 14 (illustrated as a “First” step in a system 1400), any of the application servers 171 can process a module instruction 502 to be sent to a module 101 with a module identity 110. With a plurality of application servers 171, each application server can include or be associated with an application server identity 1401. The determination and/or processing of a module instruction 502 could be for any reason application 171 i and/or application server 171 prefers for a state, value, or setting within a module 101 to change. Note that any of the illustrated application servers 171 could originate the module instruction 502, and thus a server A 105 may not know beforehand which of the multiple application servers to poll upon receipt of a message 208 from module 101 (which could comprise a second message 208 illustrated in at step 1207 in FIG. 12 and FIG. 13). At step 1206 in FIG. 14, the application server 171 processing or originating module instruction 502 can send the module instruction 502, the module identity 110, and the application server identity 1401 to a shared module database 105 k. The module instruction 502 could be sent via a secure connection data transfer 802, and other possibilities exist as well, including application server 171 having a remote connection to shared module database 105 k. Application 171 i could take an action (including an HTTP post or similar message) that would trigger an insertion of the module instruction 502 with module identity 110 into a database table within a shared module database 105 k. Application 171 i and/or application server 171 could also issue an insert command with module instruction 502, such as with, but not limited to, an structured query logic (SQL) “insert” command.

The second step in a system 1400 could comprise module 101 sending a message 208 to a member of the set of servers. Message 208 could traverse a firewall 104 and be received by server A 105. Message 208 can (i) include a module encrypted data 403 with a sensor measurement 604 a and (ii) be sent after a module 101 changes from a sleep or dormant state to an active state. Message 208 could also be received by server A 105 after network 102 and/or Internet 107 connectivity was restored for module 101 after a period of network outage. A message 208 could be similar to the exemplary messages 208 illustrated in FIG. 2, FIG. 6a , FIG. 6b , FIG. 9, and other possibilities exist as well. Message 208 can include a module identity 110. Message 208 in system 1400 could be a second message 208 illustrated at step 1207 of FIG. 12 and FIG. 13. In an exemplary embodiment, message 208 in a system 1400 is sent as a UDP datagram 601 a with forward error correction, such that module 101 sends multiple copies of the UDP datagram 601 a (such as, but not limited to, sending an exemplary 3 copies of the same UDP datagram 601 a) and server 105 can receive at least a subset of the multiple copies of the UDP datagram 601 a. Although not illustrated in FIG. 14, server A 105 may preferably already have taken steps before receiving message 208 for (i) verifying a module public key 111 and module identity 110 for module 101 and/or (ii) authenticating communication with module 101 such using a symmetric key 127 to encrypt/decrypt data. Although a message 208 is illustrated in the second step in a system 1400, server A 105 could receive other datagrams from a module 101 besides a message 208.

The third step in a system 1400 can comprise server A 105 performing a step 1302 to poll shared module database 105 k for an incoming module instruction 502 for module identity 110. Note that server A 105 may have entered a waiting state or used a wait interval 703 (for communications related to module 101 with module identity 110) before performing a step 1302 to poll shared module database 105 k. In accordance with a preferred exemplary embodiment, server A 105 may wait until after receiving message 208 (illustrated as the “Second” step in FIG. 14) before performing step 1302 because (i) before that time the module instruction 502 may not be sent to module 101 due to firewall 104, and (ii) server A 105 may prefer to allow for time up until response 209 is sent for a shared module database 105 k to collect all incoming module instructions 502 from all sources. Step 1302 can utilize a secure connection data transfer 802 or server A 105 may be able to perform SQL queries or similar commands directly with shared module database 105 k. As contemplated herein and illustrated in FIG. 14, a server 105 can use an application interface 105 x to send and receive data with a shared module database 105 k.

The fourth step in a system 1400 can comprise server A 105 receiving the module instruction 502 for module identity 110 from the shared module database 105 k using a step 1303. The module instruction 502 was received by shared module database 105 k from application server 171 using a step 1206 illustrated above. Note that any of server A 105 and server B 105 could use a step 1302 and step 1303 to communicate with shared module database 105 k, after receiving a message 208 or other data from a module 101. In an exemplary embodiment, step 1303 may also comprise a server 105 receiving the application server identity 1401 with the module instruction 502 and module identity 110. By acquiring the application server identity 1401 at a step 1303, a server 105 can record the proper application server 171 to send an acknowledgement and a timestamp 604 b at a subsequent time after successfully sending module instruction 502 to module 101.

The fifth step in a system 1400 can comprise server A 105 sending a response 209 to the module 101 with module identity 110, and the response 209 can include the module instruction 502. The module instruction 502 could be included in a server encrypted data 504. In an exemplary embodiment, response 209 is sent as a UDP datagram 601 b with both (i) forward error correction and (ii) with a destination IP:port number in the UDP datagram 601 b equal to a source IP:port number in a UDP datagram 601 a received for the message 208. In exemplary embodiments, response 209 is sent before the expiration of a firewall port-binding timeout value 117.

The sixth step in a system 1400 can comprise server A 105 receiving a server instruction 414 of an acknowledgement and/or confirmation the module instruction 502 was properly executed or processed by module 101, including a timestamp 604 a. Server instruction 414 at the sixth step could be sent in a second message 208 that also includes module identity 110, and server instruction 414 could also be in a module encrypted data 403. Timestamp 604 a could represent a time value associated with the processing of module instruction 502 by module 101, such as, but not limited to, the time when module 101 implemented an actuator setting 706, collected a sensor measurement 604 b, and other possibilities exist as well. The timestamp 604 a could be valuable for an application server 171 in order to keep track of the state of module 101 and/or a monitored unit 119, since there can be delays between when application server 171 originated a module instruction 502 and when module 101 executed or applied module instruction 502 (in addition to delays when application server 171 can receive a confirmation the module instruction 502 has been executed).

The seventh step in a system 1400 can comprise server A 105 sending an application message 701 with the timestamp 604 a to application server A 171. Application message 701 can also include the module identity 110. Note that server A 105 can obtain the proper application server 171 for sending application message 701 using the application server identity 1401 received by server A 105 in a step 1303 above. Application message 701 could also comprise an acknowledgement that module 101 properly executed the module instruction 502.

CONCLUSION

Various exemplary embodiments have been described above. Those skilled in the art will understand, however, that changes and modifications may be made to those examples without departing from the scope of the claims. 

What is claimed is:
 1. A method for supporting machine-to-machine communications, the method performed by a set of servers using at least one computer processor, the method comprising: recording a first server private key in a nonvolatile memory, wherein the first server private key is used to establish a secure connection with an application server; receiving a message through at least one local area network (LAN) interface, wherein the message includes a module identity and a module digital signature, wherein the module digital signature is verified using a first module public key, and wherein the message includes a first source Internet protocol address and port (IP:port) number; transmitting a response to the first source IP:port number, wherein the response includes a server digital signature processed using a second server private key; using the module identity to select from a module database a set of cryptographic parameters for processing a second module public key; transmitting the set of cryptographic parameters; receiving the second module public key and the module identity, wherein at least one member of the set of servers processes the second module public key using (i) the module identity and (ii) at least a portion of the set of cryptographic parameters, wherein the second module public key is verified using the first module public key, wherein the second module public key is used to decrypt a module encrypted data, and wherein the module encrypted data includes a sensor data; and transmitting the sensor data and the module identity to the application server using the secure connection.
 2. The method of claim 1, wherein the module identity in the first message comprises a first string, and wherein the module identity sent with the sensor data comprises a second string, and wherein the first string and the second string are associated with a serial number of a module.
 3. The method of claim 1, wherein the set of servers includes at least a first server and a second server, wherein (i) the first server receives the message and transmits the response, and (ii) the second server receives the module encrypted data, wherein the set of servers includes a shared module database, and wherein the shared module database records the module identity, the first module public key, and the second module public key.
 4. The method of claim 1, wherein the set of cryptographic parameters includes at least one of (i) an elliptic curve cryptography (ECC) named curve, (ii) a value for an ECC defining equation, (iii) a modulus for an RSA algorithm, (iv) a time-to-live value, (v) a value for a random number seed, (vi) a value for a module public key identity, or (vii) a value for a module random seed file.
 5. The method of claim 1, wherein a module using the module identity sends the message and the second module public key, and wherein the module derives the second module public key using at least a set of cryptographic algorithms and the set of cryptographic parameters, and wherein the module sends a digital signature with the second module public key, wherein the digital signature is processed using a first module private key, wherein a second module private key is associated with the second module public key, and wherein the first module private key and the second module private key are different.
 6. The method of claim 5, wherein the module includes an embedded universal integrated circuit card (eUICC), wherein the eUICC records a module private key associated with the first module public key, and wherein the set of servers records the first module public key and the module identity.
 7. The method of claim 1, wherein the first and second server private keys are different, wherein the first server private key is processed using an RSA algorithm and the second server private key is processed using an ECC algorithm.
 8. The method of claim 1, further comprising: receiving a module instruction and the module identity; and sending the module instruction within a server encrypted data after receiving a third message that includes the module identity, wherein the server encrypted data is ciphered using the second module public key.
 9. The method of claim 1, wherein decrypting the module encrypted data using the second module public key further comprises: decrypting the module encrypted data with a symmetric key, and at least one of (i) sending the symmetric key using an asymmetric ciphering algorithm and the second module public key, (ii) deriving the symmetric key using a key derivation function and the second module public key, or (iii) receiving (a) the symmetric key using an asymmetric ciphering algorithm and (b) a digital signature, wherein the digital signature is verified using the second module public key, wherein the symmetric key with the module identity are recorded in the module database, and wherein the symmetric key is processed using the set of cryptographic parameters selected from the module database using the module identity.
 10. The method of claim 1, wherein verifying the second module public key using the first module public key comprises at least one of (i) receiving the second module public key with a digital signature, wherein the digital signature is processed with the first module public key, or (ii) receiving an encrypted data with the second module public key, wherein the encrypted data is decrypted using the first module public key.
 11. A system for supporting machine-to-machine communications, the system comprising: a module controller for: monitoring a destination Internet protocol address and port (IP:port) number, receiving, from a module behind a firewall, a first message comprising a module identity of the module and a first source IP:port number of the module, wherein the module identity is verified using a first module public key, sending to the module at the first source IP:port number a set of cryptographic parameters for deriving a public and private key pair, receiving, from the module, a second message comprising a second module public key and the module identity, the second module public key being of a public and private key pair derived from the cryptographic parameters, wherein the second message is verified using the first module public key, receiving, from the module reconnected from behind the firewall, a third message comprising the module identity of the module and a second source IP:port number of the module, wherein the first and second source IP:port numbers are different, and sending a response to the third message from the destination IP:port number to the module at the second source IP:port number, wherein the response includes an encrypted module instruction, wherein the encrypted module instruction is ciphered using the second module public key, and wherein the module controller sends the response after receiving the second message; an application interface for using a first server private key to receive the module instruction; a module database for recording the module identity and the set of cryptographic parameters, and for sending the set of cryptographic parameters to the module controller in response to a query including the module identity; and, a processor for using a second server private key and the set of cryptographic parameters to calculate a server digital signature, wherein the server digital signature is sent from the destination IP:port number.
 12. The system of claim 11, wherein the module using the module identity sends the first, second, and third messages, wherein the module includes a set of cryptographic algorithms to derive (i) the first module public key and a first module private key and (ii) the second module public key and a second module private key, and wherein (i) after receiving the first message, and (ii) before receiving the second message, the module controller sends an instruction for the module to derive the second module public key.
 13. The system of claim 11, wherein the first module public key is verified using a shared secret key and at least one of (i) a message digest algorithm, (ii) a module digital signature, wherein the module digital signature was processed using the shared secret key, or (iii) a symmetric ciphering algorithm, wherein the symmetric ciphering algorithm uses the shared secret key.
 14. The system of claim 11, further comprising a set of cryptographic algorithms for using (i) a first server public key with the application interface, and (ii) a second server public key with the module controller, wherein the first server public key is associated with an RSA algorithm, and wherein the second public key is associated with an elliptic curve cryptography (ECC) algorithm.
 15. The system of claim 11, wherein the set of cryptographic parameters includes at least one of (i) an elliptic curve cryptography (ECC) named curve, (ii) a value for an ECC defining equation, (iii) a modulus for an RSA algorithm, (iv) a time-to-live value, or (v) a value for a module public key identity, and wherein the first message comprises a first series of datagrams, and the second message comprises a second series of datagrams.
 16. The system of claim 11, wherein the third message includes a server instruction, wherein the server instruction is received in a module encrypted data, wherein the module encrypted data includes a security token, and at least one of a sensor measurement, a registration message, or an acknowledgement, and wherein the module encrypted data is processed using the set of cryptographic parameters.
 17. The system of claim 11, further comprising the module controller for receiving a series of different module public keys with the module identity after receiving the first message, wherein each of the different module public keys in the series is verified using a prior module public key in the series.
 18. A method for supporting machine-to-machine communications, the method performed by a set of servers using at least one computer processor, the method comprising: receiving, from a module, a first message that includes a module identity of the module and a first source Internet protocol address and port (IP:port) number associated with the module, wherein the module identity is verified using a first module public key; transmitting a query to a module database and receiving a response from the module database, wherein the query includes the module identity, and wherein the response includes at least a set of cryptographic parameters for deriving a public and private key pair; transmitting a response to the module at the first source IP:port number, wherein the response includes at least a portion of the set of cryptographic parameters; receiving, from the module, a second message which includes a second module public key and the module identity, the second module public key being of a public and private key pair derived from the cryptographic parameters, wherein the second message is verified using the first module public key; receiving, from an application server, via a secure connection, a module instruction and the module identity; receiving, from the module, a third message, wherein the third message includes (i) a second source IP:port number associated with the module and (ii) the module identity; and transmitting the module instruction within a server encrypted data to the module at the second source IP:port number, wherein the server encrypted data is ciphered using the second module public key, and wherein the first and second source IP:port numbers are different.
 19. The method of claim 18, wherein the set of cryptographic parameters includes at least one of (i) an elliptic curve cryptography (ECC) named curve, (ii) a value for an ECC defining equation, (iii) a modulus for an RSA algorithm, (iv) a time-to-live value, (v) a value for a random number seed, (vi) a value for a module public key identity, or (vii) a value for a module random seed file, and wherein the first message comprises a first series of datagrams, the second message comprises a second series of datagrams.
 20. The method of claim 18, wherein the first module public key comprises a first address for the first module public key, and wherein the second module public key comprises a second address for the second module public key.
 21. The method of claim 18, wherein the set of servers includes at least a first server and a second server, wherein the first server receives the first message and the second server receives the second message, wherein the set of servers includes the module database, wherein the module database records the module instruction received from the application server, wherein the second server queries the module database for the module instruction after receiving the second message, and wherein the set of servers receives a series of public keys from the module after receiving the first message.
 22. The method of claim 18, wherein the module with the module identity sends (i) the first and the second messages, and (ii) the first and second module public keys, and wherein the module derives the second module public key using at least a set of cryptographic algorithms and the set of cryptographic parameters, and wherein the first and second module public key are different.
 23. The method of claim 18, wherein the module includes an embedded universal integrated circuit card (eUICC), wherein the eUICC records an initial module private key, wherein the set of servers records an initial module public key and uses the initial module public key to verify the module identity and the first module public key, and wherein the eUICC uses the initial module private key to verify the module identity and the first module public key with the set of servers.
 24. The method of claim 18, further comprising: receiving the module instruction from an application server; decrypting the module instruction using a first server private key, wherein the first server private key is processed using an RSA algorithm; and ciphering the server encrypted data using a second server private key, wherein the second server private key is processed using an ECC algorithm.
 25. The method of claim 18, wherein verifying the second message using the first module public key comprises authenticating a module digital signature in the second message, wherein the module digital signature is processed by the module using a first module private key, wherein the first module private key is different than a second module private key being of the public and private key pair derived from the cryptographic parameters, and wherein the first module private key comprises a secret key for the first module public key.
 26. The method of claim 18, wherein ciphering the server encrypted data using the second module public key further comprises ciphering the server encrypted data with a symmetric key, wherein the symmetric key is shared by using at least one of (i) the second module public key and a key derivation function, (ii) an asymmetric ciphering algorithm and the second module public key to encrypt the symmetric key, wherein the set of servers transmits the symmetric key, or (iii) a digital signature verified with the second module public.
 27. The method of claim 26, wherein the set of servers receives the symmetric key and the digital signature from the module, wherein the symmetric key with the module identity are recorded in the module database, and wherein the symmetric key is processed using the set of cryptographic parameters selected from the module database using the module identity. 